Home

Dodge 2008 Caliber Automobile User Manual

1. CONTENTS Bl Instruments And Controls 045 191 Mi Instrument Cluster 0 0 0 0 000 eee 192 Bl Instrument Cluster Description 193 H Electronic Digital Clock 00 204 Clock Setting Procedure 204 Bl Radio General Information 205 Radio Broadcast Signals 205 Two Types Of Signals 00 0 205 Electrical Disturbances 5 205 AM Reception FM Reception lll Sales Code REN Multimedia System If Equipped ense se meer ear fer RA 206 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped 220 e eb RIS 207 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped 207 Clock Setting Procedure 207 188 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses Hi Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files
2. 437 Certification Label cee eee 343 Charging ese in cee Bees ota eee es oe i 375 Chart Tire Sizing patire uem der dh der os 306 Child Restraint llle 64 65 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 68 73 Childi Sea maree ded ea d Se uc a ek NE 70 Circuit Breakers Lu ace que i Rear e doe Bae ae 420 Cleaning Wheels eae ER Rui alls Rus deir BRE 417 Climate Control ueso iasau aneia a e eee 251 Climate Control Rear Zone 255 261 Clock 225r b oe eare ee FER E 204 207 210 222 237 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 250 Compact Spare Tire pirisee 0 0 0 e cee 317 Compass Calibration 0000050 166 Compass Variance saimei pE llle 167 Connector UCI serpatas Sone bad reese eaten Ee 240 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 240 Console Floor leeren 181 182 Console Overhead 0004 158 159 Contract Service secre sese tanke tiaia d asa ti 454 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap ag cioe asa panas 384 385 386 406 Cooling System size ce eek Rene 403 ee INDEX 465 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 405 Coolant Capacity se sapete b 439 Coolant Level 0002 ee aes 403 407 Disposal of Used Coolant 407 Drain Flush and Refill 404 INSPOCHON is ps ia center BRI ae aS nn 407 Points to Remember 00005 407 lressute Cap sso ed ede d ue RR WES e 406 Radiator Cdp
3. 0000050 152 Rear Window Defroster l l 267 Rear Window Features 00 0000s 266 Rear Wiper Washer ees 266 Rearview Mirrors 0 0 00 00 cee eee ee 83 Reclining Front Seats ssrscsess assecar das 115 Recorder Event Data llle 62 en INDEX 475 Recreational Towing llle 360 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 361 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 363 Reformulated Gasoline liess 333 Refrigerant osuceaeuss exped r bestes 400 Release Hood os cue eR d 135 Reminder Seat Belt 000 0000 50 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 249 Remote Starting System aaa aa 27 Replacement Keys 0 000000 ce ee eee 15 Replacement Parts sirere lees 390 Replacement Dres i446 305si8 ee Pan ead res 320 Reporting Safety Defects 00 456 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 162 197 Restraints Child 0 0 0 0 0 eee nee 64 70 Restraints Occupant 6 6 0 0 eee eee eee 39 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck Lus 377 Roll Over Warning uis eee khen s eats 4 Roof Type Carrier s e eee xx Rn 183 Rotation Tires llle 324 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 76 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 77 Safety Defects Reporting 0 456 Safety Exhaust Gas 1 ee 39 Safety Informatio
4. 379 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The flasher switch is on the top of the steering column just behind the steering wheel Press the flasher switch and all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location The scissor jack and tire changing tools are stowed under WARNING the second row seat The jack is secured in place with a winged stud and a fixed stud It is very important to secure the jack tightly in place by engaging the slot in the base to the fixed stud under the middle seat The winged stud inserts through the eyelet in the end of the jack s worm screw e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be rai
5. 309 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 206 236 USB m 206 236 Positive Crankcase Valve 47 4 INDEX aa Power Brakes 2 06 de te vete ueteres aet dee ns 410 Distribution Center Fuses 384 385 386 424 Door Locks isco ba oe ew ee eee 20 29 Lift Gat ssec RR E RES 36 Mirrors unies priced px e ck RR Ue Y ER RE e 85 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 177 Steering isses eee Rv ree ea beds 294 399 Steering Filler Cap 0 0 384 385 386 SUNTOOL quic aen ER eae ies BIEN a UR Cn 174 WindOWS ees 9 bx R3 er RE Y C RES 33 Power Steering Fluid liess 441 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 52 Preparation for Jacking 00 370 Pretensioners Seat Belts a ec ewegs ipee be ale b 50 Programmable Electronic Features 162 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 04 25 Radial Ply Tites acest e ae MAKER d 316 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 404 406 Radio Broadcast Signals 205 Radio Navigation 00000005 236 Radio Operation 0 0 206 237 251 Radio Remote Controls 00055 249 Radio Satellite 206 207 236 237 244 Radio Sound Systems 0 206 236 Rear Axle Differential 00 415 Rear Camera iueiam o Cr e e RUE WEAR S 156 Rear Cup Holder i 2s res 182 Rear Liftgate sese ehe RE RE 35 Rear Park Sense System
6. Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 Fuel Selection 3 7L 4 7L 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Front Axle SAE 75W 90 Multipurpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emission Control System Maintenance 444 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 0 0 444 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N m E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 44 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type on the following pages must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper func tioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manua
7. llle 414 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 440 Fog lights s emn 141 438 Folding Rear Seat 0 0 00000000 123 126 Four Wheel Drive llle 281 Operation ies gebe SE eene IR Pe 281 Four Way Hazard Flasher 366 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 004 377 Front Axle Differential lessen 415 F l 222a de RO ERHEES 332 Filler Cap Gas Cap esses 336 338 lu MR 396 Gauge ica Peat bd bd ea ed e Ped ear e 193 Octane Rating x casa aisa a auch ae 332 440 Requirements e ete taid euge eus 332 439 lank Capacity vedo RR 439 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System Caution acras aane 0 000000 338 FUSES aeae kewuh Bee ee ee Yo 180 420 421 424 427 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 168 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 336 338 388 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 00 193 Gasoline Fuel 0 0 0 00 eee eee eee 332 Gasoline Reformulated 333 Gauges Coolant Temperature ooi sne eea EE nE a 193 Fuelizczsessdd a ee hater ae ew IHR a Ud 193 Odometer llle 196 198 Speedometer peg duode ete deed 195 Tachometer ique e REX RS ERES 196 Gear Ranges 244344482404 a tesi 4a XR hisi 276 General Information sss 16 114 332 Glass Cleaning os 9 ee ad er eee 419 Gross Axle Weight Rating 344 347 Gross Cargo Weight iere ce een 343 en INDEX 469 Gross Vehicle Weight
8. The coin slots are located under the instrument panel center stack Cup Holders Your vehicle has 8 cupholders Four are located in the center console two are located in the second row armrest and two are located in the left hand quarter panel for 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M third row occupants The four cupholders located in the center console may be removed for cleaning Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage The console is equipped with a power outlet portable phone storage bin and phone cord routing The phone storage bin can be used when easy access to the phone is needed Also the power outlet inside the console com partment can be used to power up the phone while it is being stored in the bin To use plug in the portable power recharge cord and place the cord along the opening under the forward portion of the storage bin Close the console armrest lid and plug the power cord into the phone while resting the phone in the bin The power outlet may be used for any portable item with a standard 12 volt power outlet adaptor requiring up to 20 Amps of current Rear Floor Console Features If Equipped The Rear Floor Console located between the second row bucket seat has the following features e Miscellaneous storage compartments e Cup holders e Portable phone cord routing on the sides of the console lid and the base e 12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment Tissue holder amp
9. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EE Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment If Adjustable Head Restraints All Seating Equipped Positions The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in on the right side of the driver seat and on the left side of the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down the passenger s seat Moving the lumbar control lever on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support practical at least to the level of the ears To lower the head restraint depress the release button located at the base of the head restraint and push down on the head restraint Lumbar Support Adjustment Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 8 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped The driver power seat switches are located on the left side of the driver seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjust ment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjust ment Head Restraint Adjustment Power Seat Switch Location 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped The front passenger s power seat switches are locate
10. 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L V6 AUTOMATIC BATTERY TRANSMISSION ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FUSES POWER DIPSTICK DIPSTICK FILL RESERVOIR DISTRIBUTION CENTER AIR CLEANER COOLANT POWER _ FUSES INTEGRATED COOLANT WASHER FILTER PRESSURE CAP STEERING POWER MODULE BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE 818caa32 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L V 8 AUTOMATIC ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FUSES POWER BATTERY ae DIPSTICK FILL RESERVOIR DISTRIBUTION CENTER COOLANT POWER AIR CLEANER PRESSURE STEERING FUSES INTEGRATED COOLANT WASHER FILTER CAP FLUID POWER MODULE BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE 81c733ac 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L HEMI V 8 ME O ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FUSES POWER d FILL DIPSTICK RESERVOIR DISTRIBUTION CENTER AIR CLEANER COOLANT soe FUSES INTEGRATED COOLANT WASHER FILTER PRESSURE CAP STERRE POWER MODULE BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE 818fa074 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require
11. Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Emission Related Components Fuel System Hoses And Vapor Vacuum Harnesses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking checking tears cuts abrasions and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be given to examining hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust mani fold Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage You are urged to use only the manufacturer s specified hoses and clamps or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It i
12. If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Adding Coolant uno Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant e Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the speci fied coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as e The manufacturer recommends using Mopar they may not be compatible with the radiator Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula engi
13. List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play lll Sales Code RER Multimedia System If E quipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure lll Universal Consumer Interface UCI If E quipped Connecting The iPod Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons Play Mode E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 189 List Or Browse Mode 243 PTY Button Seek asi sace xe eR UR 248 Wi Video Entertainment System Satellite Antenna llle 248 esie Code SV IEEIREDSd v odds dore a Reception Quality 00 0000 00s 248 H Satellite Radio If Equipped 244 ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 249 System Activation aces haer em eae 245 Right Hand Switch Functions sess NumbeGSN SD reser cce cecis 245 UeltHand Switch Functions For Radio RAK Radios vse sss sees 246 Obeft Hand Switch Functions For Media Le CD Operation ies em chance age ee 250 SECURE a A d ll Compact Disc Maintenance 250 Storing And Selecting Preset Channel vens a lll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 251 Menden i SIDE bos ann
14. The satellite navigation capability combines a Global Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identifica tion selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes A shared Hard Drive HDD for the navigation system the database and other radio features allows uploads of E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 237 music and photos from CDs or through the USB port While the Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections Traffic Messaging optional easy store pre sets parental lockout for VES if equipped backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual
15. e Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track e Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track three times to listen to the third track and so forth e Press the button located in the center of the switch to change to the next preset that you have programmed COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the compact discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 251 NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain cond
16. tem prompts Ready to accept vcard entry via Blue tooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone owners Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook manual for specific instructions on how to send these i NOTE Editing names in the phone book is recom entries from your phone mended when vehicle is not in motion NOTE u e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans Aone Bene Pilon SO Benin fers of phonebook entries to use this feature e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they Phonebook Eat are already connected to any system via Bluetooth You will then be asked for the name of the phone book and you may see a message on the phone display that entry that you wish to edit the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone owners manual e When prompted recite the new phone number for the for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth phone book entry that you are editing connection e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book
17. the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled
18. 20 Bl Remote Keyless Entry 0040 20 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 21 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 Using The Panic Alarm essen 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information llle 24 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 Battery Replacement 06 26 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 27 Mi Door Locks 2 0 cee 28 Manual Door Locks 00 00004 28 Power Door Locks 000 000 eee 29 Child Protection Door Lock 32 a Windows i 2535 53 2 PRI ERAS Ed oe 33 Power Windows lees 33 Auto DOWN 46iek e angue we durch o ange 34 Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Driver s And Front Passenger Door Only 34 Window Lockout Switch sessa 35 MLC ALC EP 35 Power Liftgate If Equipped 36 ll Occupant Restraints esee RR 39 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 40 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 45 Second Row Center Seat Belt 46 Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped i esn enii bpa pat REESE ORE 46 Rear 60 40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point Belt It Equipped 4 e mese 47 Seat Belt Pretensioners llle 50 Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder Sy
19. CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature light is on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until the light turns off If the if the light remains on turn the engine off immediately and call for service ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 195 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 8 Speedometer Shows the vehicles speed 9 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 10 Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 11 ABS Warning Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System fes which is described elsewhere in this manual This light will come on
20. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield wiper de icer Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru ments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abr
21. domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display 218 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 incl
22. e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mo par cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a cle
23. e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration SEATS Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat near the floor Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired position Release the bar to lock the seat into position Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjuster es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners The bucket seats are equipped with recliners The reclin ing mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right side of the passenger s seat and the left side of the driver seat To recline lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback is locked WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest
24. e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phone book enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone DV for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 radio or the mirror has the two control buttons Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button that will enable you to acce
25. equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 223 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will be
26. fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN CAUTION CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Transfer Case Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is evident the transfer case fluid level may be low Have the transfer case serviced immediately Damage may result from operation of the vehicle with low transfer case fluid Drain And Refill Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended transfer case fluid change intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Axles Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Drain And Refill Follow the Maintenan
27. options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems Total load must be limited so that GVWR is not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo 344 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Tire Size This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure Cold This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighin
28. refer to the make sure that all windows are closed and the Child Restraint section in this manual can be used to climate control blower switch is set at high speed hold infant and child restraint systems DO NOT use the recirculation mode e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system Gas props support the liftgate in the open position properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as However because the gas pressure drops with tempera possible ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and that
29. when not in use As a safety precaution the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch ON When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automati cally when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position There are two additional 12 V 20 total Amps for both outlets power outlets one located in the storage bin of the center console and another located in the right rear cargo area These outlets can be reconfigured by the customer to operate only when the ignition is ON switched battery fed or with the ignition ON or OFF battery fed to allow for cellular telephone charging and or operation while the ignition is off NOTE Allaccessories connected to these outlets should be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge unless the cus tomer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery feed See page 179 for more information 115V Inverter Outlet If Equipped This vehicle may also be equipped with a 115 Volt 150 Watts Maximum outlet on the rear of the front center console These outlets can power cell phones electronics and other low power devices This plug is controlled by a switch located in left lower instrument panel Press the switch to turn the power on to the outlet Press the switch a second to turn the power off 178 UNDERSTANDING
30. xs 620 peg oe PEREROES 406 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 404 439 440 Temperature Gauge 0 00000005 193 Cruise Control Speed Control 149 Cup Holdet serere icetdeedidee eb RR eed 181 Customer Assistance 000 e eee eee 452 Data Recorder Event 0 0 00 eee nee 62 Daytime Running Lights 141 Dealer Service 12xanexedcerae de wee oR oe eae 390 Defroster Rear Window 267 Defroster Windshield 76 254 259 260 Delay Intermittent Wipers 144 Diagnostic System Onboard 387 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 206 236 Dimmer Switch Headlight 194 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 411 Oil Engine occas ia emer hes paniikkia 391 Power Steering c2 ix Prose bae doe sms 399 Disarming Theft System llle 19 Disc Brakes llle 410 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 407 Door L0cks kek a RR ERR RR RR Door Locks Automatic lese Door Opener Garage saccis cc 6 eee eee Drive Belts 3 5 pk PIdcoe eed eden Drive Shaft Universal Joints 466 INDEX BEEN Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water iios aae gus state a bad VOR RR aes a 288 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 244 E 859 Tel idaceenceza aci Ca ao a vua ds 339 Electric Remote Mirrors llle 85 Electrical Power Out
31. 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ib 100 Ibs 80 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 865 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 EN STARTING AND OPERATING 313 WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure 1 Safety WARNING e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure e Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or le
32. 20 000 12 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent 18 000 30 000 18 trailer towing Inspect the CV Joints Perform the first inspection at M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months 25 000 207000 i Inspect Exhaust System Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months ind oem i Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot 24 000 40 000 24 seals replace if necessary 448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 Inspect the transfer case fluid 30 000 50 000 30 Replace the t f k pl 4 7L ines Rep ace the top row of spark plugs on engines 30 000 50 000 30 Replace the spark plugs on 3 7L and 5 7L engines 30 000 50 000 30 Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change main sump filter 4 7L 5 7L engines only This 60 000 100 000 60 applies only if your vehicle is used for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid change filter 3 7L engines This applies only if your vehicle 60 000 100 000 60 is used for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing M A l
33. 3 7L SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Qt 4 7L 4 7L SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Ot 5 7L 5 7L SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Qt 6 6L Cooling System includes 2 1 Qts 2L for coolant bottle 3 7L without Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 13 5 Ot 12 9L 3 7L with Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 14 5 Ot 13 8L 4 7L without Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 13 1 Ot 12 5L 4 7L with Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 14 2 Ot 13 5L 5 7L without Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula NA NA 5 7L with Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 16 6 Ot 15 8L NOTE All fluid capacities are approximate 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology 3 7 4 7L 5 7L Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter Mopar Engine Oil Filter P N 5281090 or equivalent Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine REC14MCC4 Gap 0 043 Spark Plugs 4 7L Engine Upper Bank FR8TE2 Gap 0 039 Lower Bank FR8T1332 Gap 0 051
34. 947 Bl Climate Controls 2 0 0000 0 e eee 251 PTY Button Scan eee eee eens 247 Manual Control 0000 asad 251 190 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Air Conditioning Operation 252 Front Blower Control 00 0 252 Front Mode Control 0 0 253 Rear Temperature Control If Equipped 255 Rear Window Defrosting And Rear Window Washer Wiper ciae hb Rte RE de 256 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 23 rx fake hd SES EYES 256 Automatic Control llle 257 Level Of Automatic Control 257 Manual Control ATC 5 258 Rear Zone Climate Control If Equipped 261 Rear Rotary Temperature Control 262 Front Unit To Rear Unit Chart 263 Operating Tips persse eee eee eee eee 263 Operating Tips Chart 265 ll Rear Window Features 0 266 Rear Window Wiper Washer 266 Rear Window Defrosting 267 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 1 Headlight Switch 2 Air Outlets 3 Demister Outlets 4 Instrument Cluster 5 Airbags 6 Glove Box 7 Radio 8 Climate Controls 9 Rear Washer Wiper 10 Power Outlet 11 Heated Seat Switches 12 Electronic Stability System ESP Off Switch INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONT
35. AND CONTROLS ME and adjust the temperature control and blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort For high humidity condi tions it may be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to maintain comfort Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the Air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode position on the control Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make s
36. Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers each year and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 and Excessive Spend million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person Always Buckle Up is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up See Owner s Manual For Further Information HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section 80bfe0t0 contains the information you desire Rollover Warning Label The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual 6 INTRODUCTION R my Bit WATER IN FUEL Lx WIPER INTERMITTENT FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELO INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER n Y P g FUELFILLSIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER WASHER FLUID LEVEL WINDSHIELD ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY DEFROST HEATED BATTERY HEATEDMIRROR WINDSHIELD CHARGING DEFROST GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER INTAKE AIR STEERINGFLUID AND WASHER HEATER OY ys REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB FAILURE X D e 7 HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS zD e X wf eda x HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE PEDALS 1 UPPER AIR OUTLET MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR NX e aim
37. Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 231 SCAN Button CD MODE Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio to the Radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA
38. Control If Equipped 149 To Activate To Set At A Desired Speed 150 To Deactivate is o beezdeshe deecf 4e edd ss 150 To Resume Speed 000 0000 150 To Vary The Speed Setting 151 To Accelerate For Passing 152 ll Rear Park Assist System If Equipped 152 H Rear Camera If Equipped 156 W Overhead Console useless 158 Courtesy Reading Lights 158 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ll Overhead Console With Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Dome Reading Lights Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Compass Temperature Button lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming HomeLink Gate Operator Canadian Programming Using HomeLink Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button Security Troubleshooting Tips General Information ll Power Sunroof If Equipped Express Open Feature Wind Buffeting Sunroof Maintenance Bl Electrical Power Outlets 115V Inverter Outlet If Equipped Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off Battery Fed Configuration Bl Floor Console Floor Console Features Rear Floor Console Features If Equipped H Factory Installed Roof Luggage Rack ll Cargo Manage
39. Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oils and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
40. IN PARK Press and release the menu button until the Personal Settings displays on the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 e RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st When DRV DR Ist is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first Use the STEP button to display one of the following e LANGUAGE When in this display you may select one of several different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Press the RESET button while in this display to select your preferred language Then as you continue the infor mation will display in the selected language AUTO DOOR LOCKS gt YES When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT YES When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Neutral position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors To make your selection press and release the RESET button until DRV DR 1st appears RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST When All ALL DR 1ST is s
41. If Service Park Assist System appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer To turn on off the rear park assist system refer to the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Section 3 of this Owner Manual REAR CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Camera system that allows you to see an on screen image located in the screen of your Radio of the rear of your vehicle whenever it is put into R Reverse The camera is located in the light bar over the rear license plate NOTE Refer to Setting Display Properties under Sys tem Settings in the Navigation User s Manual for instruc tions regarding navigation screen brightness adjustments Use the following steps to access the Rear Backup Cam era feature 1 Start the engine 2 Depress the brake pedal and place shift lever in R Reverse 3 Wait one to two seconds and the camera view will display on the Radio screen NOTE The camera view will display only while the vehicle is in R Reverse 4 Perform a visual check of the rear area NOTE CHECK ENTIRE SURROUNDINGS before backing up 5 Slowly backup as necessary 6 Place the sift lever in P Park or D Drive to exit the Rear Backup Camera system es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when e To avoi
42. Integrated Power Module will display in the odometer NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with an EVIC most warnings will display in the EVIC For additional infor mation refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 3 The outside temperature will display in the odometer for non EVIC equipped vehicles Pressing the trip odometer reset button toggles the feature back to the odometer Change Oil Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style 198 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK positi
43. N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or fre 60 000 100 000 60 quent trailer towing EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first M A N T E Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months N Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow C plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service 60 000 100 000 60 E commercial service off road desert operation or i more then 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90F 32C H Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary 90 000 150 000 90 E Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 U Replace the ignition cables on 4 7L engines 102 000 170 000 102 L Replace the side row of spark plugs on 4 7L engines E LP por pons MVC MESE 102 000 170 000 102 S 8 Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid change 120 000 200 000 120 filter 3 7L engines 450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change main sump
44. Positions And Linking Remote Adjustable Head Restraints All Seating Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 132 Positions e x cae hse yea ped OE ES 116 Memory Position Recall lus 133 8 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped 117 To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory 134 4 Way Passenger s Power Seat If Self Limiting Control nsss saaa aaa aaa 134 PEE RE n Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control 135 ei LL MEER i ll To Open And Close The Hood 135 Sra di di did A del e M DAE Em 137 Interior Lights uude spp en rns 138 Battery Savet is scans e acean SUR RO ROS Ren 139 Headlight Delay 00004 139 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 140 Headlights Parking Lights Panel Lights 140 Illuminated Entry 0000 140 Daytime Running Lights Canada Only 141 Lights On Reminder sess 141 Fog Lights If Equipped 141 Multifunction Control Lever 142 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 144 Windshield Wipers osataan itso 144 Windshield Washers 4 4 146 H Tilt Steering Column 2 22 147 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 ll Driver Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 148 Adjustment eee 148 Electronic Speed
45. REOS ROS RUE SUE 276 411 FUR P 413 Ge expec toaaee stig alae nee dee Risa ae cannes 441 Maintenance 0 0000 eee eee 411 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 26 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 168 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 00 25 Tread Wear Indicators 00 319 Tip Odometer csse eR Rem e 198 Trip Odometer Reset Button 204 Turn Signals oss Eee pes 142 193 432 UGIGonnectO i2ee ekbenes Meee eae RES 240 UConnect Hands Free Phone 87 236 Underhood Fuses lees 424 Uniform Tire Quality Grades issu 458 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 240 Universal Serial Bus USB Port 206 236 Universal Transmitter lessen 168 USB Port 2643 RERO EE Ru E 206 236 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 04 409 Vanity Mirrors sess eh ee d 86 Variance Compass eass ee eee eee 167 480 INDEX aaa Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle Information Center 159 Vehicle Loading 4x acces m er ees 310 343 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage esee enn 429 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 05 244 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 193 Warning Roll Over 24409444 044000344045 pi 4 Warnings and Cautions 04 7 Warra
46. Rating 346 GVWR axe gae e TR Re BES ASS 343 346 Hands Free Phone UConnect 87 236 237 Hard Drive HDD 3g ERE cee ae 206 236 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 0 0 0000 e eee eee 288 Hazard Warning Flasher 04 366 Headlights cose cee nee ba Cee ee eee 430 Cleaning 15 x ocyus Rd Haus ete ede ES 418 Dd apr PET 139 High Beam i eds 00 bere ERES e 143 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 143 Lights On Reminder sss 141 PASSING ius ec edo dre adea deg legs 143 Replacing ss timegi mete scit dE Rae deb ede 430 Heated Mirtors seem aie are See Recens 87 Heated Seats 2 9 24 eo sad ed Patched eee te 118 Heater saec ee a eS xe SER A E Ra 3 251 Heater Engine Block 4 ere emn 276 High Beam Indicator llle 194 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 143 Hitches Trailer Towing HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 168 Hood Release llle 135 HOSeS 2cees c ER Dee a eS SES 409 Ignition sa re et ERE 12 17 C rcr 12 ROCK teases Gag ete PEE se Sa eae Ne 17 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 Illuminated Entty i esce bases hehe 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key issus 13 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 0 64 65 Inflation Pressure Tires 000000 eee 322 Information Center 470 INDEX EE Information Center Vehicle 159 Inside Rearview Mir
47. STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 68 kg 150 Ibs allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 1096 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle 348 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a
48. SYSTEM with single chime Premium TPM System Only 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M OIL CHANGE REQUIRED If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Menu button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the trans mission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT
49. Stuck Freeing Dur ROO zoo scd Re ton RIP AURI ECRIRE e 174 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 322 Synthetic Engine Oil 2 2 6 eee 394 System Navigation 00 00 seus 236 System Remote Starting lille 27 Tachometer ire ab Rte REESE YS 196 Taillights 6 60s eda e RR ERRORES CERES 432 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 256 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 193 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 68 Theft System Arming llle 19 Theft System Disarming llle 19 Tilt Steering Column 000000 147 Tire and Loading Information Placard 309 322 Tire Identification Number TIN 308 Tire Markings 52er rv RR obi hes 305 Tire Safety Information 0 305 NE C 77 313 458 Aging Life of Dres 5 rre hes 319 Air Pressure soi acs a noh eU as 313 Alignment icckeiet n hes ek e der bs 321 Chains ids e328 ee Gn bac da aE 322 Changing ct navi sie at te ARS atm eth oo 368 Compact Spare 5 sagte Reb due Hea es 317 General Information 000005 313 High Speed savers o4 canant Geis Seele ce a 316 Inflation Pressures 0 0 eee uaia 314 Jacking Strato sat nde ete Sin Raa toa ote ices 370 Life Of TiteS 2ieex4ka4ce key e Re EG 319 Load Capacity ex RR Re boas 309 310 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 325 Pressure Warning Light 0 201 Quality Grading srce spe paite
50. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS This vehicle has three auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered
51. The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual for additional information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is
52. UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least 2 inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is n
53. Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as wo
54. a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in
55. and TSC Trailer Sway Control All six systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are com monly referred to as ESP ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS NOTE ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers 206 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING BAS Brake Assist System E fot books FEES Heg e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents 81663882 The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must ESP Off Switch Location never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking manner which could jeopardize the user s safety capability during emergency braking maneuvers The or the saf
56. anenee sipak 458 Radial sa 250b ere UT reed a quin 316 Replacement 2 08 neo eee Redeem e 320 Rotam ede Rees CE Rd oo ee AE 324 Dally we Spe nEn e E edens 305 313 SIZES 2543 bs e RUE PR s Rip ed 306 Snow Hes iud hes 9 SoS 0k b ae ux Re 323 Spare Dite nwt tnde soe dem bp d e iens 368 Spinning i cacsacc esc e rkcr ae ds 318 Tread Wear Indicators 0005 319 Wheel Mounting llle 370 Wheel Nut Torque llle 373 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 352 Torque Converter Clutch 004 280 Tow Hooks Emergency sess 377 TOWNS 15 6s bdo Cu qu Ie e ec et tr 346 Disabled Vehicle 0000 eee eae 378 Guder 3s cos ewe ees ee 352 Recreational 21263 dace cheng ROM C Yen 360 Weights i524 C 352 TraCtiOl S034 44 eei Rd Sete ooo Poe he 287 Traction Control 0 0 0 0 cee ee 198 298 Trailer LOWin 8 04049 atic e Beane Re De 346 en INDEX 479 Cooling System Tips 050 359 Hites daere e eed E eee es 351 Minimum Requirements lisse 353 Trailer and Tongue Weight 352 Wiring a9 Rd eee aci e EG E 356 Trailer Towing Guide lees 352 Trailer Weight sisse e e Ren 352 Transaxle cei a gee dex mE E PATER SA 276 Automatic elles 12 276 Operation iaeei ie ark E PER AA SUR 276 Transfer Cas i i seg R3 e a ve 3 XS 414 Elid sen farted bb ERES x REOS 441 Transmission p eraa gak 276 411 Automate gages ane dp
57. are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Many of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer 336 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control sys ADDING FUEL tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap warbon Monoxide Warnings The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door If the gas cap is WARNING lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning NOTE To avoid contact between fuel cap and paint hang tether strap over hook provided on inner fuel door CAUTION Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monox ide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an ex tended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired
58. belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine performance and emission control The plugs installed in your vehicle should operate satisfactorily in normal service for the mileage indicated in the Maintenance Chart New plugs should be installed at this mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the proper type of spark plug for your vehicle When replacing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Engine Air Cleaner Filter Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended en gine air cleaner filter change intervals WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Fuel Filter A plugg
59. button until Personal Set rity Alarm is active tings is displayed WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of 4 Press and release RESET button until the proper the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a variance zone is selected according to the variance map garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufac tured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for held transmitters that operate devices such as garage safety information or assistance door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off of your vehi cle s battery 3 Press the STEP button until Compass Variance is displayed 5 Press and release the Compass Temperature button to exit es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained
60. cellular phone es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual The UCon nect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect s
61. cycles This is a normal occurrence since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and improve fuel economy Recirculate Button Press this button to recirculate the air inside the CES vehicle Outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle Use this mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke dust or when rapid cooling of the interior is required Manual control of Recirculation is possible only in Panel Floor and Bi Level modes It will not operate in Mix or Defrost modes The recirculation symbol will flash three times indicating recirculation is not available in these modes INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 259 NOTE If the interior of the windows begin to fog press the recirculate button to return to outside air Some conditions will cause captured interior air to fog win dows when in recirculate mode Panel 7 4 Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow Floor Heat Air flows primarily through the floor outlets lo cated under the instrument panel A small amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Pe Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlets 260 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Bi Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and those located on the floor NOTE There is a difference in tempe
62. described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward to unlock the door turn the key forward See Section 7 of this manual for door lock lubrication SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will s
63. e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry will be use only the first 24 characters in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phone book entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phone book entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phone book from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phone book entry in
64. ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445 if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in System Status EVIC Displays of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Once a Month CAUTION e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the batt
65. files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 232 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading ti
66. has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This be repeated type of start can be dangerous if done improperly See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled on fuel injected engines and will decrease as the engine warms up 276 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The 3 7L 4 7L engine block heat
67. hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 352 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings NOTE For additional trailer towing information maxi mum trailer weight ratings refer to the following website addresses e http www dodge com towing e http www dodge ca Canada Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch TOW HEIGHT 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer instal
68. hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser and radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser and radiator Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules the system should be drained flushed and refilled
69. in the wheel liner 8192c6cd 3 Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the headlight from the fender panel 4 While firmly holding the headlight in your hands disconnect all connectors by following the procedure described in step number 5 below 5 Remove the bulb connector from the headlight making sure to pull and release the red tab on all connectors Loosen the connector by pressing down on the black and or green release which is located below or above the red tab The green release is located above the red tab on the H13 the black release is located above the 3457AK red tab 6 Twist and remove socket from lamp 7 Remove bulb from socket and replace NOTE These are Halogen bulbs Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat build up which reduces bulb life 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Side Marker Tail Lights Turn Signals And Backup Lights Replacement 1 Remove the two push pins from the tail light housing X ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 2 Rotate the light to the outboard side of the vehicle and 3 Unlock and remove electrical connector remove 811488945 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Remove the three screws holding the bulb strip to the 5 Remove the bulb strip from the tail light lens back of the tail lamp 811a88ae ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 6 Remove bulbs from bulb strip by pu
70. in 4WD LOW Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOCK or neutral to 4WD LOW the ESP system will be in this mode In 4WD LOW ESP function is desensitized until the vehicle reaches a speed of 30 mph 48 km h At 30 mph 48 km h the normal ESP stability function returns and the ESP TCS Indicator Light turns off When the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph 40 km h the ESP system goes back to Partial Off ESP is desensitized at low vehicle speeds in 4WD LOW so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h The ABS is in a special Off Road mode that allows wheels to lock at lower speeds if gravel is detected to shorten stopping distances NOTE When the vehicle is in 4WD LOW a feature of the ESP system remains active whether the ESP is on or off This feature functions similar to a limited slip differ ential and controls the wheel spin across an axle If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning es STARTING AND OPERATING 303 WARNING In the Partial Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable ESP BAS Warning Lamp and ESP TCS Indic
71. is in a seat and of part of the belt Follow these instructions to using a seat belt properly wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat Removing Slack From Belt 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pulling Out Belt and Latchplate 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your WARNING abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight you properly The lap portion could ride too high on tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt your body possibly causing internal injuries Always red
72. line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To unlock the doors and liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and liftgate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the keyfob NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm
73. listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default subtitle language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not mm listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between subtitle OFF or ON 228 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS xe Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the menu button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a
74. measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer
75. of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 462 INDEX BEEN ABS Anti Lock Brake System 195 291 Adding Fuel eee eem ey 336 Adjustable Pedals 0 0000000008 148 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 395 Air Conditioner Maintenance 252 399 Air Conditioning cee 251 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 263 Air Conditioning Rear Zone 255 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 399 400 Air Conditioning System 251 399 Air Filter i222 999 0083 004 384 385 386 395 Air Pressure Tires llli 314 322 Altbae esce 99 e he eere eS 53 203 Airbag Light es sasaaa Ru ERR I ER 61 76 Alarm Pate a dai Sueciae ede vae Sane E aes 24 Alarm Security Alarm 0 18 195 Alignment and Balance 04 321 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 000 248 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 404 405 439 Dispos
76. on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recom mended by the manufacturer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your truck NOTE The use of class S chains is permitted on your vehicle with P245 70R17 tires CAUTION Do not use tire chains on 4x4 trucks equipped with tires other than P245 70R17 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of your vehicle There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle SNOW TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc tion as the front tires Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire These tires should always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may
77. on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 211 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequen
78. precautions should be observed e Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area e It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for more than a short period If so adjust your climate control system to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed and the controls in any position except OFF or RECIRC The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle or damage to the underside or rear of the vehicle Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja cent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace or adjust as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Heater Defroster Ducts Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation Check for proper air flow through all defroster ducts If there are any question regarding the operation of your heater defroster ducts have the system checked by an authorized dealer Se
79. pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 316 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed
80. restraint restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may A rearward facing infant restraint should only be not work when you need it used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere or fatal to the infant e The second row outside seating positions and all third row seats have cinching latch plates The second row center position has an automatic locking retractor These are designed to keep the lap portion tight ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section Buckle the child int
81. rotated to the second upward detent position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are ON you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are re quired during the day es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery Load Shed ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for eight minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled off the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8 minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for 8 minutes while the ignition is off the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON NOTE
82. section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 3 Without releasing the button proceed with PRO GRAMMING HOMELINK Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code Did you unplug t
83. should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also
84. sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se irritation continues see your doctor If these particles Maintaining Your Airbag System settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac WARNING turer s instructions for cleaning e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the e Modifications to any part of the airbag system airbags have deployed If you are involved in another could cause it to fail when you need it You could collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or WARNING wiring including adding any kind of badges or
85. step for each remaining button DO NOT 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Butor erase the channels 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training Gate Operator Canadian Programming button The name and color of the button may vary by Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig manufacturer nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming step after the Learn button has been pressed 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAIN ING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this
86. than WARNING appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP TCS Indicator Light e ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent The ESP TCS Indicator Light starts to flash as the natural laws of physics from acting on the soon as the tires lose traction and the TCS or vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded ESP system becomes active It will also flash ESP cannot prevent accidents including those once a swaying trailer 13 detected and the TSC resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydro Trailer Sway Control system activates If the ESP TCS planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease can prevent accidents up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has 2 available operating modes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 4WD 4WD LOCK or 2WD Models conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor ON mally allow is required to gain traction TSC Trailer This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOCK Sway Control is not available when the system is in the and in 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or ieri ipee aes E a span nu M depress the ESP Cont
87. the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter if so equipped The two round lamps are also operated individually as reading lights by press ing the center of each lens NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF they will turn off after 15 minutes es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH ELECTRONIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF Equipped EQUIPPED The overhead console contains dome reading lights and an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Dome Reading Lights Located in the overhead console are two dome reading lights The dome reading lights illuminate when a door is opened or when the interior lights are turned on by rotating the dimmer control located on the Headlight Switch 81970b55 The reading lights are activated by pressing the center of E Pressing the menu button will change the each lens E display to one of the following features NOTE The dome reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Trip Functions Pressing the STEP button allows you to scroll through one of the following Tri
88. the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to re
89. the case together Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves If equipped install and tighten the screw until snug Test transmitter operation REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting system which will allow the vehicle to be started from distances up to approximately 300 feet away from the vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is part of your ignition key In order to remote start your vehicle the hood liftgate and all the doors must be closed To remote start your vehicle press the REMOTE START button on the key fob twice within three seconds To indicate that the vehicle is about to start the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly 81a7e6cd Remote Start Transmitter Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press the REMOTE START button once 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the key fob After the vehicle is unlocked you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle insert the key in the Ignition and move it to the RUN position otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto matically turn off Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamp
90. the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system secured in a rear seating position Child Restraint Tether Anchor There are tether strap anchorages behind each seating position in the second row and behind the center seating position in the case of the third row seat 60 40 split bench if equipped To install child restraint tether follow these instructions 1 Place the child restraint in the center seating position E of the third row of seats 81c4a82b Third Row Seat Tether Anchor 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two headrest posts 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor located on the seat back and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers or even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Follow the instruc tions for Child Restraint Tether Anchor in this sec tion See your dealer for help if necessary Transporting Pets Airbags deploying i
91. the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section later in this owner s manual 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has window bags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Air Bag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller Side Remote Acceleration Sensors Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Window Bags above Side Windows Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Knee Impact Bolsters Front Acceleration Sensors Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 How the Airbag System Works Also the ORC
92. then remain on until the first engine crank or the key is turned off This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the first engine crank or the key is turned off This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform
93. they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people belts are designed to go around the large bones of riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously your body These are the strongest parts of your injured or killed body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle
94. this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the Auto i mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window VIN Location on your vehicle the vehcile registration and title NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN 8 INTRODUCTION EBENEN VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A Word About Your Keys 040 12 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 Locking Doors With The Key 13 WM Sentry Key oe ch ee osa ke ER ERR 13 Replacement Keys ena panad sa piha h inaa 15 Customer Key Programming 15 General Information 00 16 H Ignition And Steering Lock 17 Ignition Accessory Delay Feature 18 H Security Alarm System If Equipped 18 To Set The Alarm 2ikde4 drm eR 19 To Disarm The System 00 0 19 B Wiuminated Entty i e m 20 Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
95. three second row seating positions have lower an chorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attach ments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installa tion instructions Second Row Seat Right Side Second Row Seat Left Side 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
96. time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track RW Rewind Button Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the current track Holding the RW button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back 5 seconds of the current track FF Fast Forward Button Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the current track Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward 5 seconds of the current track SEEK Buttons Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next track If the left down button is pressed during the first 2 seconds of the current track it will go back to the 242 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS BEEN previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track If the right up button is pressed during Play mode it will go to the next track in the list INFO Button Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the information Track Title Artist Album etc for that track Each press the INFO button will take you to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all of the screens the last press of the INFO button will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio REPEAT Button Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing track SCAN B
97. to inflate the window bag The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to children The window bag is only about 3 1 2 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 NOTE At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the impact sensors detect a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra
98. to the OFF position and buckle the driver seat belt DO NOT start the engine or press the trip reset button 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the seat belt Warning Light to turn off If during this time the seat belt becomes unbuckled or the engine is cranked or started programming will be cancelled 3 Unbuckle and then re buckle the driver seat belt three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled A chime will sound immediately once the feature has toggled If during this time the ignition switch is turned out of the ON position or the timer expires programming mode will be cancelled 4 Programming mode will be cancelled after the feature has toggled with the seat belt still buckled or if the ignition switch is turned to the lock position or 10 seconds after the feature has toggled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unbuckled 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible
99. turns on the AIRBAG warning light in the instrument cluster for 6 to 8 seconds e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines N S PD for a self check when the ignition is first turned if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de on After the self check the AIRBAG warning 55 res NM ki light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation Midi pad m provided by the ORC E C will Pert of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will detect a Toll over vanen equipped iih side altings sound if the light comes on again after initial start up The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in WARNING the START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru column and knee bolsters If the key is in the OFF ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to position in the ACC position or not in the ignition protect you in a collision If the light does not come the airbags are not on and will not inflate on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away During a moderate to severe rear impact the ORC may de
100. under torque converter clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cooldown the transmission will resume normal opera tion 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL button This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode 5th gear if equipped is disabled and 2 3 and 3 4 shift patterns are modified Shifts into Overdrive 4th gear are allowed during steady cruise for improved fuel economy and automatic closed throttle downshifts to 3rd gear for improved braking will occur during steady braking The TOW HAUL light will illuminate in the instru ment cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL
101. when pads are replaced If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type WARNING Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specifications may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching on fire es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow a petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Brake Hoses Inspection should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced or at intervals specified Inspect hy draulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with possible burst failure WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any sign of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check NOTE If equipped with a dipstick use the following proce
102. wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety
103. worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 320 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your orig
104. 0 eee eee 457 Setting the Clock 204 207 210 222 237 Settings Personal sisas sfear nedeg iiaii 162 Shifting Automatic Transmission 276 Transfer Case 2 1 es 281 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 222 moe URBES nra Ca Gero 361 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N sc22s5 425 URP ERESPIMGRPQP ns 363 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 45 Shoulder Belts llle 40 Signals TUM ied pea oe Ren 142 193 432 Snow Chains Tire Chains 322 SHOW PIOW aa sui duces Gla Maa Ee Gee a alae d 359 Snow Tires serere 9 e e dm een ees 323 Sound Systems Radio 206 236 Spare Tire ec y a prre Rue b DER ea 317 en INDEX 477 Spark Plugs os len eee Rae ee 395 Speed Control Cruise Control 149 Speedomet r lt i esses cache ce AR s 195 Starting sedis p pb RE x phe RITE 273 Automatic Transmission 273 Emergency Jump Starting 375 Engine Block Heater 20 276 Engine Fails to Start 00000 274 Remote xke pe Galen Y XR RE 27 Starting Procedures 273 Steering Column Controls llle 142 Column Lock 2 22244 d RET 17 Power 6 24 06 Bebe da CASE RE Se See Re 294 399 Wheel THE 222a itinira Bh ede awe ed 147 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls i42 oeque RIPE R oes PES ER EES 249 Storage Vehicle ue dece tin hae ak aes 429
105. 13 30 Amp JB Feed RR Yellow Pink 22 20 Amp Next Generation 14 40 Amp ESP Pump Yellow Controller NGC Green Batt 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cartridge Mini 0l Cartridge Mini o Cavity Fuse Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Euse Description Relay Relay 23 20 Amp Trailer Tow 32 Relay Starter Yellow 33 Relay Electronic Auto 24 15 Amp A C Clutch matic Transaxle Blue EATX 25 15 Amp Stop Lamp Switch 34 Relay AC Clutch Blue 35 Relay Fuel Pump Rly 26 Spare 36 Spare 27 20 Amp Run Start Relay 37 Relay Stop Lamp Switch Yellow Feed 38 Spare 7 Spare 39 Relay Blower Motor Roy Renee 40 Relay Auto Shut Down 30 Relay Run Remote ASD Rly 31 Spare ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 Fuses Integrated Power Module otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on mo m the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart INTEGRATED i i POWER Cartridge Mini MODULE Cavity Fuse F Description Relay use 1 Relay Wiper On Off Rly 2 Relay Wiper Hi Lo Rly 3 Relay Horn Rly 4 Relay Rear Wiper Rly 5 Relay Lt Trailer Tow Stop Turn Rly 6 Relay Rt Trailer Tow Integrated Power Module Stop Turn Rly An integrated Power Module is located in the left side of Relay Park Lamps Rly the engine compartment This center contains cartridge 8 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps fuses mini fuses and relays A description of each fuse Red an
106. 19 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available 220 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M
107. 4 e n Uv DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION OUTLET A WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DoF VA 3 Gt CX LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL J i a5 b INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON N 4 y 4 Ee DX LOWER ANCHORS SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON BAS E Da eecrrowic FLESIRONC STABILITY Mis PROGRAM BRAKE SPEEDCONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM PUR MERATURE BRAKE al SRS D T mr BRAKE SYSTEM HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING SUPPLEMENTAL CONTROL BRAKE RESTRAINT SYSTEM awo E o ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK PASSENGER DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOURWHEEL WARNING PARKING DRIVE BRAKE DOOR AJAR MALFUNCTION CONVERTIBLE WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT TOP DOWN HAZARD TRANS CONVERTIBLE OIL TEMP TOP UF kc HORN CI SEE OWNER S MANUAL i80 DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE a CARGO LAMP 81b8d09e INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read
108. 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To lock the doors and liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once Horn Chirp Programming The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly plants activated If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on the key fob 2 After holding the LOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds 3 Release both buttons at the same time en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 5 Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the ve hicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with t
109. 5 miles 25 km or faster than 30 mph it must be towed on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground or with the front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly NOTE Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground at more than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe transmission damage MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 7L V6 384 Bl Engine Compartment 4 7L V 8 385 ll Engine Compartment 5 7L HEMI V 8 386 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 387 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 388 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs xa eem c3 rale d x aem haces 388 B Replacement Parts xar x ern mnes 390 W Dealer Service llle 390 Bl Maintenance Procedures 391 Engine Oll err epa v rr der eta bie 391 Engine Oil Filter 2 0 0 0 2 394 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 394 opark Plugs nace cea e be hk ente 395 F Engine Air Cleaner Filter 395 Engine Fuel Filter eiee scccr ene 396 Catalytic Converter 4 isse ee 396 Maintenance Free Battery 397 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Power Steering Fluid Check 399 Air Conditione
110. 7 Seat Cushion Pockets Seat Cushion Movement Up And Forward 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The seat belt buckles are hinged to fold with the seat back WARNING Do not sit in the third row seat unless the cushion and back are properly engaged Proper engagement can be verified by pushing pulling on the upright seatback The seatback will not move unless properly engaged Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row seatback s folded or tumbled In a collision you CAUTION could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured When loading cargo into the rear of you vehicle with the 3rd row seat folded flat be careful not to damage the material on the head restraints HEEEEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Third Row 60 40 Folding If Equipped Third Row Seat 40 Seatback Fold Third Row Seat 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SEATBACK RETURN PULL EATBACK RELEASE Third Row Seat Features Third Row Seat Folded Forward ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 brake and accelerator pedals position Automatic Tem perature Control ATC temperature and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed Third Row Seat Return Pull Strap DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM IF EQUI
111. A digital temperature setting for driver and passenger will be displayed The ATC system uses an infrared sensor located in the overhead console to measure the tem perature of the driver and passengers Based on the sensor input the system will automatically control comfort by varying the temperature fan speed and mode This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions It is important that objects are not blocking the infrared sensor It is also impor tant that objects are not used that may scratch or damage it in any way Level Of Automatic Control 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation It is not necessary to move the temperature setting for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the tem perature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible NOTE In cold weather the fan will not turn on in AUTO mode until the engine coolant has warmed up sufficiently This is indicated by the WARM UP DELAY message on the display NOTE The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric by selecting the US M customer programmable 258 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS feature Refer to the Overhead Console Customer Pro grammable Features The mode will also be shown in the display and will change as required during au
112. A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 308 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation standards and is approved for highw
113. Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop WARNING e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 294 STARTING AND OPERATING Se When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the Anti lock Brake system you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system Engagement of the Anti lock Brake System may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indi cate that the system is functioning properly POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The sys
114. CONTROLS M AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 215 Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This Radio is capable of p
115. Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 e Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition b
116. Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not protect you in another collision Have the airbags modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Enhanced Accident Response System If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically the engine will shut off and the hazard lights will turn on In addition approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will light until the ignition switch is turned off Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if a
117. ERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 To Tumble the 4076 seat fully raise the lever on the side of the seat to release the floor latches and tumble the seat WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the outer 40 second mM row seats in the tumbled position The outer 4076 second row seats are only intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third row seat Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury Fold Tumble and Recline Lever 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The seatback must be fully folded into the down position to allow the lever to be raised enough to release the floor latches Tumble Lever To Fold and Tumble the 2nd row 4096 seats from the 3rd row fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the seatback Continue raising the lever to release the floor latches to tumble the seat NOTE The head restraints must be lowered but do not have to be removed to fold and tumble the seats Third Row Seat Bench If Equipped To Fold The Seats Folding the third seat occurs in two stages First the cushion is lifted and moved forward from the pockets at the front of the cushion The cushion will rest onto the floor directly behind the second row seat Second the top of the back is folded forward and rests onto the cushion The back will not fold unless the cushion has been folded forward first es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 12
118. FF press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once When the Panic mode is activated the interior lights will illuminate the headlamps and parking lights will flash and the horn will sound To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter a second time Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is started or exceeds 15 mph 24 km h During the Panic Mode the door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally Panic mode will not disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Programming Additional Tra
119. For most city and highway driving 2 Second For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain roads where more precise speed control is desirable Use it also when climbing long grades and for engine brak ing when descending moderately steep grades To pre vent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 miles per hour 72 km h in this range 1 First For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at low speeds 25 mph 40 km h or less when going down hill To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h in this range en STARTING AND OPERATING 279 Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth and fifth if equipped speed Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the transmission selector is in Drive e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal operating tempera ture NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the Note
120. GVWR nor GAWR capabilities are exceeded Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten service life NOTE The weights shown in this chart are not the weights for your vehicle Also the amount of load added to both the front and rear axles can be computed 346 STARTING AND OPERATING after the vehicle has been weighed both in its curb weight condition and in its loaded and ready for operation condition Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 6500 LBS FRONT CURB 2153 REARCURB 1458 FRONT LOAD _ 423 REARLOAD 1466 FRONT WEIGHT 2576 REAR WEIGHT 2924 LOADED LOADED GAWR FRONT 3600 GAWR REAR 3900 TOTAL LOADED WEIGHT 5500 LBS 8120c425 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR ee
121. K position do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the LOCK direction 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To re activate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Auto Unlock On Exit If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened excluding the liftgate This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of Park and all doors closed This feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks Lock or Unlock Auto Unlock On Exit Programming If Equipped Customer Programming sequence to enable or disable the Auto Unlock Feature e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this program ming proce
122. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTER 811caded This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collisio
123. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Mini Fuse Color Description Cavity Mini Fuse Color Description Instrument Clus Airbags F1 15 Amp Blue ter Battery Feed F5 2 10 Amp Red 2 Fuses in Yel F2 10 Amp Red Spare low Holder Ignition Run F6 2 Amp Clear Perce Run Start for Next P Start Unlock Generation Con Radio Battery troller NGC ad ao no Natal Feed F3 10 Amp Red Integrated Ignition Run Power Module Start for IPM AC Relay F8 10 Amp Red Cluster Transfer and Fuel Pump Case Seat Sw Relay Back lighting Door Node and Satellite Digital NEN red eae Audio Receiver pe OWET INHTTOE SDAR Digital Switch Battery F9 10 Amp Red Video D Feed DVD Battery Feed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 CMTC Sentry Key Diagnostics Cavity Mini Fuse Color Description Cavity Mini Fuse Color Description F10 10 Amp Red Spare F16 20 Amp Yellow Reconfigurable F11 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors R Power Outlets Cluster Batter Ignition Run F12 20 Amp Yellow Feed n FI7 20 Amp Yellow Rear Park Assist Ignition Run Second Row RAC Module Heated Seats F13 10 Amp Red Heated Rear F18 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Glass EBL Re Ignition lay F19 10 Amp Red Spare Fuse ABS Module Ig Heating amp Air ds 0 Amp Red nition Run F20 15Amp Blue Conditioning Battery Feed P w ATC Only Blue Tooth Battery Feed F15 iGAmp Blue Compas Tap F21 25 Amp Nat
124. MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode RAQ and RAK Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 247 Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre set stations you may also commit 12 satellit
125. NTROLS 221 SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C LOAD 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL 8189f8f9 REQ Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio mm Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio 222 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if
126. PPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat position driver s outside mirror position adjustable Your vehicle was delivered with two Remote Keyless Entry transmitters One or both transmitters can be 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to two transmitters each transmit ter linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the SET S button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store new settings 1 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and both side view mirrors to the desired positions NOTE Not all motors may be moved at one time Please refer to the 8 way power seat description 2 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 3 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 4 Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control ATC while the ATC is in Auto mode 5 Press and release the SET S button located on the driver s door 6 Within 5 seconds press and release memory button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be per formed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory po sit
127. Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds when ignition is off Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CO
128. ROLS ol 13 Transfer Case Switch 14 Speed Control Switches 15 Hood Release 16 Adjustable Pedal Control Switch 17 115v Inverter Switch If Equipped 81954da5 191 192 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Instrument Cluster 81c71455 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Fuel Gage The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Temperature Gage E The temperature gage indicates engine coolant CRT temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operat ing satisfactorily The gage needle in V6 and V8 engines will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy traffic or when towing a trailer If the needle rises to the H mark stop the vehicle shift into N Neutral increase engine speed for 2 3 minutes If the temperature reading does not return to normal seek authorized service immedi ately INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 193 CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en gine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator if the engine overheats The gage pointer will remain near its last reading when mm the engine is turned off It will return to a true reading when the engine is restarted 3 Turn Signal Indicators When a turn signal is activated a right
129. Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press Phone button to accept the call To reject the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold T
130. Rising Water ccce 288 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation 281 Ghallow Gating Weiler ce ciis erts 288 ee oe H Parking Brake i 22443444 ERR 544 290 Information Precautions If Equipped 281 270 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Erro oo C cm 291 Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS 291 H Power Steering ocesteeserme he t 294 li Electronic Brake Control System 295 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 295 BAS Brake Assist System 296 TCS Traction Control System 298 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 298 ESP Electronic Stability Program 299 li Multi Displacement System MDS 5 7L Enein Only iso eae gros eo eed eG 304 H Tire Safety Information 305 Tire Markings eene mr eene 305 Tire Identification Number TIN 308 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 309 Bl Tires General Information 313 Tre Pressures oae ee ac Rot a he ER ee 313 Tire Inflation Pressures 314 Radial Ply ites 4 ecesksetbeede RE 316 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 317 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 317 Tire Spinning is 24b ee ti baie eae Eras 318 Tread Wear Indicators 05 319 Life Of Tires 4 iu Sav katipa etx dne Re 319 Re
131. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION eek mex m Uer EP ceew e eile oe e x ENERE EENET E T CE E e 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 02 c cc ccc ccc hh tmn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 ccc wcrc ccc mnn 4 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 2 0 cece tts creer ccc c eee hh hn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING cece wesc eve cc rtrt tern t t tn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 0 ccc cc cece cece cece cece eee hh m hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ssrssisssss ccc cece cece cece hh hh hh m hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2c cece cece c ccc c cece hh hh m hh nn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 00 ccceccccccccccceccceecvcesvcesvces 10 INDEX Op EEUU INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E introduction ss sees 4 Bl Warnings And Cautions 00 7 Mi Rollover Warning 6 6 eee piping 4 Bi Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl How To Use This Manual 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help a
132. Synthetic llle 394 Dtaf hg isses xa ore kd eric ENEE es 273 Temperature Gauge llle 193 Entry System Illuminated 20 Equipment Identification Plate 364 Event Data Recorder sss 62 Exhaust Gas Caution 39 75 336 403 Exhaust System 223a e ex PT 75 402 Extender Seat Belt llle 52 Exterior Lighting sisse cristis senestrers 140 Fabie Care cues o 4 oie eae OE a ate RS 417 Filters Air Cleaner 1442254 8 2 Ged i ae BES 395 Engine Fuel uae ak ws elas Sea as 396 Engine Oil icem ree nes 394 440 Engine Oil Disposal 200 394 Flashers Hazard Warning 00 0 0 cece eee 366 Tum Signal oscar bse ER aes ERE 142 193 432 Flat Tire Stowage llle 368 374 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range sss i uer RE Rae E 342 Engine Oll i ciseco esc heb E RYE ER 341 Fuel Requirements 0 339 340 Maintenance eas a ge ei REB Pee es 342 Replacement Parts 0 00505 342 Staring sae eda do Re REG E RAE 341 Flooded Engine Starting llus 274 FlorConsole eee 181 182 Fluid Brak 409 24004 hed edwin YI 410 441 Fluid Capacities cerra RR asin Red 439 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 411 Pake k ernie dirae ae ERRET E 410 HO 468 INDEX aa Engine OIL caos ace etend CR RU Basan 391 Power Steering 3 3 ve cese races ks enekes et 399 Transfer Case
133. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE When the Inverter Switch is pressed there will NOTE Due to build in overload protection the inverter be a delay of approximately 1 second before the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded status indicator turns ON The status Indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is produc WARNING ing AC power To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a 3 Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 115 V Inverter Switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF Battery Fed Configuration CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution 115V Inverter Plug After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
134. Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Use the Tune Control Knob to scroll through the entries Push the Audio Select button to select an entry and make changes 226 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu If Equipped gt II e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc If Equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc If Equipped e Angle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc If Equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT b
135. The light will illuminate to indicate that the heating elements are ON Turning Off the rear window defroster or the ignition will deactivate the heated mirrors Automatic Dimming Driver s Exterior Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying light glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside mirror and can be turned off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER radio contains an inte grated Hands Free Communication UConnect sys tem Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for this ra dio UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See UConnect website for sup ported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following web sites e www chrysler com uconnect
136. While the engine is running the system will deactivate the Fog Lights and Heated seats if a low battery system voltage is detected Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is cycled off while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off The headlights will remain on for 90 seconds Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch ON then OFF or by turning the ignition ON The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Headlamp Off Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Headlights If Equipped Automatic Headlights can be activated by rotating the rotary headlight switch to the symbol A The head lights will turn on when the engine is running and the ambient light sensor indicates that the headlights should be activated The headlights will turn off if the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or 90 seconds after the ignition is turned to OFF Headlights Parking Lights Panel Lights When the headlight switch is rotated to the first position to the right the parking l
137. age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information 350 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT gigioes 81811968 Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System en STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Fifth Wheel Hitch A special high platform w
138. aint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics chil dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Small Children e This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn babies at the right front passenger seat position If a car bed must be used to transport a newborn baby the car bed must be installed in the second seating row only e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do
139. ake place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NOTE Flashing neutral N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage internal parts EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood inner surface The following information about your vehicle is dis played on this plate Model Wheelbase Vehicle Identifi cation Number Truck Order Number and code numbers with descriptions of all production and special equip ment on the truck as shipped from the factory NOTE Always refer to the equipment identification plate when ordering parts WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 366 W Jump Starting Procedures 375 H Jacking And Tire Changing 367 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 0 0 Jack Location ecc ERR RR S 367 WiEmergency Tow Hooks If Equipped H Jacking Instructions 00 0 368 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle Removing The Spare Tire 368 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Tire Changing Procedure l i 370 Two Wheel Drive Vehicles
140. ake your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in
141. al 36d qoe eee b hom ed 407 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 291 295 Anti Lock Warning Light s 195 Anti Theft System 00000005 18 195 Appearance Care sarcen r Unea eA K AAE 415 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 19 Audio Systems Radio issus 206 236 Auto Unlock Doors llle 162 Automatic Dimming Mirror 83 87 Automatic Door Locks 0005 30 162 Automatic Headlights 06 140 Automatic Transaxle 0000000 12 276 Automatic Transmission 273 276 411 Adding Fluid 4 25 412 Fluid and Filter Changes 413 Fluid Level Check ocra renidi eticii ietas 411 Huid Types cia whats siete ce eR RR RR 441 Gear Ranges ss eee ace C eses 276 en INDEX 463 Special Additives llle 413 Brake System 6 6 ee eee 291 410 Torque Conv rtef iis sca nd et e re v 280 Anti Lock ABS 020005 291 295 Axle Fluids aea red BOR Mae dU Reb wane a 441 Disc Brakes 2k ea E we Ea sra 410 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 414 Faid Check i 2i steve caves bing oa cee ae 410 FOSES es a Sone bored e Re REO X A RERES 411 Balk Joints 2 4 esos eR REY Oe ce bea ess 400 Master Cylinder isses sou neva cairns 410 Battery segs eas e ey ead 384 385 386 397 Parking acid ies m ce eee cna te Eg 290 Charging ix Ge eon e aonb nn soe hs 375 Warning Light isses 195 199 Emergency St
142. al towing The Neutral N selection button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch Shifts into and out of transfer case Neutral N can take place with the selector switch in any mode position You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case Neutral N position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from Shifting into Neutral N the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for despite the transmission position The parking brake recreational towing should always be applied when the driver is not in CAUTION the vehicle It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that CAUTION Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a the transfer case is fully in Neutral N before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing 1 Bring vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut engine OFF 362 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine 4 Depress brake pedal 5 Shift automatic transmission to Neutral N 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case Neutral N button for 4 seconds 7 After shift is comp
143. all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while
144. amp switch must be in the A auto mode before this feature will work HEADLAMPS W WIPERS YES When ON is selected the headlamps will automatically turn on when the wiper switch is activated EASY EXIT SEAT YES When ON is selected and the key is removed from the ignition the driver s seat will automatically move rearward to allow easy exit TILT MIRRORS IN R gt YES When On is selected and the transmission is put in reverse the outside mirrors will tilt downward ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 KEY OFF POWER DELAY gt OFF When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min appears ILLUMINATED APRCH OFF When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the RESET button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears PARK ASST SYSTEM YES When YES is selected the Rear Park Assist System is activated When No is selected the System is deactivated UNIT IN gt US METRIC The EVIC odometer can b
145. an damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi purpose cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and trim Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights
146. an expect your miles per gallon mpg and your driving range to decrease by about 30 com pared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E 85 fuel follow Sched ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability es STARTING AND OPERATING 343 VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door 8120c1d2 This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and shows the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle
147. any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHAN NELS Release the buttons when the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open amp close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to r
148. applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn off If the headlights are activated the Daytime Running Lights feature will transition to the normal headlight operating mode Lights on Reminder If the headlights parking lights or courtesy lights are left On after the ignition is turned Off a continuous fast chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped 81b01c7e Fog Light Switch The fog lights are turned ON by placing the headlight rotary control in the parking light headlight or Auto position and pressing the fog light button The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are ON or when the vehicle headlights are ON low beam An 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pressed in when the head light switch is rotated to the OFF position or the high beam is selected Multifunction Control Lever The multifunction control lever is located on the left side of the steering column Turn Signals Move the lever up or down to signal a right hand or left hand turn The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn and proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is
149. are parking brake The transfer case Neutral N position not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 40 km h disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from 25 mph the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit EN STARTING AND OPERATING 285 For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the following informa tion 4WD Normal Four Wheel Drive High Range Employs inter axle differential Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds All road surfaces 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock 4WD LOCK Locks the transfer case inter axle differential Forces front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range 4WD LOW Low speed 4 wheel drive Locks the transfer case inter axle differen tial Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose sl
150. arting 00000005 9 2 brakes setts sade e ec eine eed dud 291 Gas Caution dese cave he oS a ee ad 375 Brake Transmission Interlock 276 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 74 Saving Feature Protection 139 Bulb Replacement 004 430 Belts Drive venosa 230 Db dew e ead qud 394 Bulbs Light gt 202006022000 RR REG 430 Belts Seif usa ORR Re se Re 40 Body Mechanism Lubrication 401 Calibration Compass e essee sese eskisi essa 166 B Pillar Location lle 309 Camera Rear idus do de ERU der dn d Sd 156 Brake Assist System ce ciste be Dikes i 296 Capacities Fluid etetea oe atanta 439 Brake Control System Electronic 295 Caps Filler Brake Fluid lt lt o oo ese nk adesad en ur 441 Biel s etacsacaesaa seuss EE 336 HO 464 INDEX BEEN Oil Engin caos ce seh reto ORC ee GR s 393 Power Steering 4 4 races ka Aaa d 399 Radiator Coolant Pressure 406 Car Washes veda re ex pe SAY EG 416 Carbon Monoxide Warning 75 336 Cargo Management System 04 185 Cargo Organizer lees 185 Cargo Organizer ecco cane b bre Ta eres 185 Cargo Vehicle Loading 6 343 Catalytic Converter 396 CD Compact Disc Player 206 236 Cellular Phone 0005 87 236 237 251 Center High Mounted Stop Light
151. asive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSE BLOCK CAUTION When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it suggests a problem in the circuit that must be corrected NOTE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for longer than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may do this by disconnecting the battery or by disconnecting the two ignition off draw LO D fuses located in the Auxiliary Power Distribution Center PDC located in the engine compartment The LO D cavities include a snap in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block Pressing the I O D fuse back into the cavity reconnects it MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 Fuses Interior The fuse block contains blade type mini fuses relays and circuit breakers for high current circuits It is located in the left kick panel It is accessible through a snap in cover 819625ae 422
152. at Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc or if the front airbags have deployed If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see you authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer If there is a problem with the airbag light the seatbelt light will flash ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure Lights Check the operation of all exterior lights Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks D Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel water oil or other fluid leaks Also if fuel f
153. at it is locked in the upright position WARNING A 20 seatback that is not fully latched in the upright position will not protect you properly Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Second Row Center Seat Belt The center seating position in the second row has a seat belt assembly that can be converted from the normal emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode The seat belt should only be used in the automatic locking mode when a child seat is installed at this seating location When sitting in this seating location ensure the seatback is fully engaged with the seatback latch by pushing rearward on the center seatback until you hear a click that signals latch engagement Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward unti
154. ate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 459 on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level
155. ator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warn ing Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TSC Trailer Sway Control TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system will reduce engine power and apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of the trailer TSC
156. ay use This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 means the 3rd week 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only d eda to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 coul represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811adOdO Tire Placard Location STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRO THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS NEVER EXCEED XXX KG T125 70D15 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire
157. battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Connecting the iPod Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI connector which is located in the glove box on some vehicles This location may vary with vehicle Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle system this may take a few seconds to connect the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod display and it starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below Controlling the iPod using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode the iPod audio track if available from iPod will start playing over the vehicle audio system E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 241 Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Play mode In this Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data TUNE SCROLL Knob Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to go to the next or previous track The TUNE SCROLL knob functions similar to the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first 2 seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list and turning this button at any other
158. be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types 324 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride EJ E FRONT E 0 cXERS 8031e864 Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure the placard is lo cated on the drivers side B pillar The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C Thi
159. ce Schedule for recommended axle fluid change intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Rear Axle Rear Axle fluid levels should be 7 8 in 22mm 1 4 in 6 mm below the fill hole for 8 1 4 in and 9 1 4 in axles should be 1 5 8 in 31mm 1 4 in 6 mm Front Axle Front Axle fluid level should be 3 4 in 20 mm 1 4 in 6 mm below the level of the fill hole Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the resul
160. changes will affect tire pressure e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire pressure in the tire failure or condition Base System If Equipped e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless while adjusting your tire pressure technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure ciues to ihe Receiveri Module Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire 5 5 tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the stopping ability tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte the proper pressure nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS consists of correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even the following components if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale lamp e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Receiver Module 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Tire Pressure Monitoring Tel
161. charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips 458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear r
162. cies TUNE Control Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones 212 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the Music Type button t
163. ck for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park With a manual transmission shift the transmission into reverse And with four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in neutral Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR EN STARTING AND OPERATING 355 2 GTW Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage 3 GAWR before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Indicators for the proper inspection procedure This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires Towing Requirements Tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase i icle imits Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact Hie yericle d GY WR and GS IUIS m spare tire Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Proper tire inflation pressures are essen
164. conds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 235 SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating In
165. creen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 209 SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate SEEK SCAN Ca RND MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT 9 TUNE SCROLL au x 9 8189f8f5 RES Radio Non Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it Wh
166. cts a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 203 CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 25 Airbag Indicator The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 9 seconds when the ignition is first turned ON If the light does not come on when the ignition is first turn
167. d and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Electric Remote Control Mirrors The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver s door trim panel um is Power Mirror Control Mirror Directions To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use Lighted Vanity Mirror the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover turns off the light ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Heated Mirrors If Equipped Heated mirrors are automatically activated when you depress the rear window defroster switch located on the instrument panel
168. d by a qualified technician es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Second Row Bucket Seats Fold and Tumble 3 Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the Second row bucket seats have seatback recliners on both outboard side of the seat and push the seatback forward seating positions Raising the lever allows the seatback to be reclined an additional 11 degrees The second row bucket seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy access to the third seat or rear cargo area To fold and tumble the seat follow these steps 1 Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the Seat 2 Lower the head restraint to its full downward posi tion 8 mene ee Folding the Seatback 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Pull up on the release handle and lift to tumble the seat fully forward If the seat contacts the rear of the front seat move the front seat forward Tumbling the Seat Forward To relatch the seat tilt the seat rearward and push down firmly to engage the rear attachments Then lift the seatback release lever and pull the seatback up to return it to its full upright position To fold and tumble the 2nd row seats from the 3rd row fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the seatback Continue lifting the lever to release the floor latches to tumble the seat SARS Tumble Lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 WARNING In a co
169. d component may be stamped on the inside cover 10 Amp Trailer Tow Park Red Lamps 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini Cavity Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Description Fuse Fuse Relay Relay 10 10 Amp Rt Park Lamps 18 20 Amp Front Control Mod Red Yellow ule FCM Batt 1 11 Relay Radiator Fan Hi Rly 19 20 Amp Lt Trailer Tow Stop 12 20 Amp Front Control Mod Yellow Turn Yellow ule FCM Batt 4 20 20 Amp Front Control Mod 13 20Amp Front Control Mod Yellow ule FCM Batt 3 Yellow ule FCM Batt 2 21 20 Amp Rt Trailer Tow 14 20 Amp Adjustable Pedal Yellow Stop Turn Yellow 22 30 Amp Front Control Mod 15 20Amp Ft Fog Lamps Pink ule FCM BATT 5 Yellow 23 40 Amp Radiator Fan 16 20Amp Horn Green Yellow 24 Relay Radiator Fan Lo Rly 17 20 Amp Rear Wiper 25 Relay Ft Fog Lamps Rly Yellow en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 Cartridge Cavity Fuse n Description use Relay 26 Relay Adjustable Pedal Rly 27 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw Green IOD 1 28 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw Green IOD 2 29 Spare 30 Spare VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we recommend that you take the following steps to mini mize the drain on your vehicle s battery e Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw fuse LO D fuse located i
170. d on the right side of the passenger seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls forward rearward adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment NOTE The 4 way seat does not have an up down adjustment Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the driver front passenger and second row seats The controls for the front heated seats are located on the instrument panel below the climate con trols Front Heated Seat Switches 81228806 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 The front heated seat system allows the driver and front passenger to select from two different levels of supple mental electrical seat heating or no seat heating to suit their individual comfort requirements With the ignition switch in the RUN position depressing the heated seat switch rocker to its momentary high or low position provides power to the heated seat element and maintains the requested temperature setting If the heated seat switch is depressed to a different position low or high than the currently selected state the re quested temperature setting will change to a new selec tion If the heated seat switch is depressed a second time to the same position as the currently selected state the seat heater will turn off The controls for the second row heated seats are located on the center console between the second row seats Rear Heated Seats Switches Each heated seat switch has two settin
171. d restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The second and third row seats have either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are d
172. d to accelerated brake lining wear higher Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN 2 LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN 1 PINS PARK mies GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP TURN ELECTRIC GROUND QE Us BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic STARTING AND OPERATING 357 358 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL feature should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL feature while operat ing the vehicle un
173. d vehicle damage the Rear Camera System using the Rear Camera System Always check care should only be used as a parking aid and is unable fully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for to view every obstacle or object in your drive pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or path blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must con tinue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Camera Sys tem to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recommended that the driver look fre quently over his her shoulder when using the Rear Camera System NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console has the following features 81926899 e Courtesy Lights e Garage Door Opener If Equipped e Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Courtesy Reading Lights Near the front of the console is one courtesy and two reading lights All lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position fully upward position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on
174. dals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected NOTE Achime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To Disable A Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 2 Press and release the memory SET S button located on the driver s door 3 Within 10 seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter To disable another transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 3 for each transmitter NOTE The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to memory is enabled when delivered from the factory The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to memory can be disabled or later reen abled by a qualified DaimlerChrysler representative For vehicles equipped with the Electronic vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details Self Limiting Control To improve vehicle reliability the memory system in cludes a self limiting control for full travel positioning of power seat and Adjustable Pedal movement all direc tions This self limiting control may however develop an unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is encountered at sometime du
175. defective If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system the arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down NOTE Ifa turn signal has been left on for at least a mile duration a continuous chime will sound 8196c9d5 Turn Signal Lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Turn Signal Auto Mode Tap the multi function control lever once and the turn signal left or right will flash 3 times and automatically turn off Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will momentarily allow the high and low beams to energize at the same time Within one second the headlights will switch to high beams 8196c9d1 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the Dimmer Lever steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or LOW beam 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wipers Windshield Wiper Switch The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction control lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause betw
176. der heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See the Maintenance Schedule in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Tow Haul If Equipped To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency en STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling Sys
177. disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Radio Mode Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 229 window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow y
178. dure 3 Insert the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If necessary repeat the above procedure 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors of your vehicle have the child protection door lock system 81976445 Child Lock To use the system open each rear door and slide the control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage the child protection locks When the system on a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE After setting the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position NOTE For emerg
179. dure If your vehicle has a capped dipstick it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE least 15 miles 24 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P Park 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE Ifitis necessary to check the t
180. e Each time the button is tapped speed will decrease For example tapping the button 3 times will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the table below refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine To decrease speed while the speed control is on press and hold the DECEL button Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Functions 37L 4 7L 5 7L Engines Engage Speed 25 mph 40 km h Minimun RESUME Speed 20 mph 32 km h ACCEL Increase 1 mph 2 km h DECEL Decrease 1 mph 2 km h Dropout Speed 20 mph 32 km h 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE When driving uphill at elevations above 2 000 feet 610 meters or when the vehicle is heavily loaded especially when towing the vehicle may slow below the SET speed If the vehicle speed drops below refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine the speed control will automatically disengage If this hap pens you can push down on the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im prove vehicle performance it is advisable to lock
181. e brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377 WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the gear selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE while applying slight pressure to the accelerator The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Allow the engine to idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the fr
182. e changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until US or METRIC appears COMPASS VARIANCE gt 8 Press the RESET button to change the compass variance setting Set this to your current location If you change location change your variance according to your variance on the variance map Refer to Compass Variance in this section for additional information COMPASS CALIBRATE gt YES Press the RESET button to manually calibrate the compass Refer to Manual Compass Calibration in this section for addi tional information 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Compass Temperature Button Pressing the Compass Temperature button OD will return the display to the normal compass temperature display NOTE Temperature accuracy can be effected from heat soak For best accuracy the vehicle should be driven at a speed greater than 20 mph 32 km h for several min utes Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which reduces the need to calibrate the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns at speeds less than 5 mph km h in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will no
183. e has reached the desired speed press and release the SET button Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal normal braking or pressing the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control with out erasing the memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the memory WARNING Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system to cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the sys tem OFF when you aren t using it To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push and release the RESUME button Resume can be used at any speed above refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is on speed can be increased by pressing and holding the ACCEL button When the button is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed increase refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine Each time the button is tapped speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by three increments Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed decrease refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engin
184. e may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States llle KR55120123 Canada 25593 r E Pau RE ES 2671 5120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un 800diab leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circum stances may result in poorer performance REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD The 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under nor
185. e stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button If Equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search 248 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with a luggage rack do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perfor mance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satell
186. e that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low the preceding safety tips Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by
187. e the wheel to be Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn raised into place against the underside of the vehicle Continue Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack 2 times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when itis on a jack several times to be sure it is firmly in place Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the value stem facing the ground EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts Check the Battery Test Indicator if equipped If a light or bright colored dot is visible in the indica
188. e will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock you can manually adjust the time by performing the following 1 Turn on the system ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 239 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words GPS Time are displayed The user clock time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backwa
189. eattaching the small keyed buckle latch plate and keyed buckle ensure the seat belt web bing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceeding procedure to detach the SIDA small latch plate from the keyed buckle untwist Third Row Center Seat Belt the webbing and reattach the small latch plate and keyed buckle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 To reattach the seat belt to the third row center seat pull the small keyed buckle latch plate forward from the headliner slots and insert it into the keyed buckle until there is an audible click Refer to the previous section for the proper seat belt usage 81663bf3 Headliner Stowage Slots Third Row Center Seat Belt 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension er
190. eceived The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPM System Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for 3 seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor s is not being received If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a non matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1 This spare tire does not ha
191. ed for a period greater than 1 second while in the OFF position the wiper will wipe approximately three wipes after the wash knob is released 8193a7f8 Washer Fluid Switch To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 To tilt the column pull rearward on the lever below the WARNING turn signal control and move the wheel up or down as desired Push the lever forward to lock the column firmly in place Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving Tilt Steering Column Lever 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE BEEEEEEEEEMEMARMAMMAMAMME amp EEEC NN DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED Adjustment 1 Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10 inches 254 mm away from the airbag located in the center of the steering wheel 2 Fasten and adjust the seatbelts 3 Move the adjustable pedal switch located to the left of the steering column near the parking brake release up to move the pedals toward the driver or down to move the pedals away from the dr
192. ed fuel filter can cause stalling limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent filter replacement may be necessary Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 WARNING To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in materials that can bur
193. ed on or the light stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag system checked by an autho rized dealer 26 4WD Indicator Indicates when transfer case is in 4WD position 27 SVC Service 4WD Indicator The SVC 4WD lights will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and will stay on for 2 seconds If the light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 28 Cruise Light Speed Control This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on 29 TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear shift lever This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected 204 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se 30 4LOW Indicator Indicates transfer case is in 4LOW position 31 Odometer Trip Odometer Button Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer display Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time keep ing is accurately maintained On the AM FM CD 6 disc radio t
194. ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires 202 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under inflated Ac cordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system dete
195. ed with the key fob s 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNLOCK button or by inserting a programmed Sentry Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON position ILLUMINATED ENTRY Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the doors are unlocked using the key fob The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the last door is closed or until all doors are closed and either the ignition is turned to the ON position or a key fob LOCK button is pressed There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the interior lights off after 8 minutes if the ignition is OFF and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY 8165df1a Five Button Transmitter NOTE For the remote starting feature if equipped refer to the Remote Starting System section NOTE For the power liftgate feature if equipped refer to the Power Liftgate section ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE Your vehicle s keyfob may have three four or five buttons shown depending on the optional features purchased with your vehicle This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a minimum of 66 feet 20 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE The
196. eel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish once the up dated tire pressure s have been r
197. een a battery powered remote control and two head sets The system is located in the headliner behind the front row seat Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers over 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 245 System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate y
198. een cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the LO continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 2 seconds The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km or less es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use NOTE Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield NOTE If the front wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wipers will resume operation 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Windshield Washers To use the washer push in on the washer knob on the end of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is desired If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is push
199. ehicle is equipped with a non matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1 This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor ing sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the spare tire 2 If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wh
200. eight ics 2icedadedoviedads Loading cert beret eate dere Oe gs B Trailer Towing qos sa PraqerETIrd PRESTA Common Towing Definitions Trailer Hitch Classification lll Equipment Identification Plate Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 352 Trailer And Tongue Weight 352 Towing Requirements liess 353 Towing lips ce ee Rees 357 OW POW aos ond evene neous x dry NOS 359 lll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 360 Recreational Towing 2WD Models 360 Recreational Towing 4WD Models 360 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both WARNING inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts Do not leave children or animals inside parked WARNING Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep Automatic Transmission in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or E moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in driving range the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries Normal S
201. el 332 Oil Change Indicator 162 197 en INDEX 473 Oil Change Indicator Reset 197 Oil Engine use yen ov o n 391 440 Capacity se cran mitia s Es do ex Era te 439 Change Interval llle 392 Dipstick 4 ssec o Rr e ERE ES 391 Disposal sciens C ENS RR be ean 394 Filter costs e M eee 3e ES 394 440 Filter Disposal llle 394 Identification Logo llle 393 Materials Added to 000000 394 Recommendation sss 393 439 Synthetic iesu seg diver ade Sob ur end 394 VISCOSIty e 63 4 eed ha P pA PE a E dea 393 439 Onboard Diagnostic System 387 388 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 168 Outside Rearview Mirrors liliis 84 OVGRdTIVE 54229 9 04 34b Ea CA 196 279 Overdrive OFF Switch ere ie aiamaa saae ena 279 Overhead Console Ls 158 159 Overheating Engine llle 194 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 457 Panic Alarmi 2 04444 ke b ea reed on 24 Park Sense System Rear oes 152 Parking Brake ssa Doent eR Res 290 Parking On Hill 1 i e exe eme 290 Passing Light cst ke ERE Ra 143 Pedals Adjustable 000005 148 Personal Settings 05 eo ed eter YE 162 o c PEE 74 Pets Transporting 6 6 6 aaie ndh eee 74 Phone Cellular 87 236 237 Phone Hands Free UConnect 87 236 237 Placard Tire and Loading Information
202. el tank level MI TO EMPTY cannot be reset through the RESET button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle e loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Global Reset If the RESET button is pressed twice within 2 seconds while in any of the 3 resettable displays AVG MPG ET ELAPSED TIME and TRIP System Status EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic e Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e TURN SIGNALS ON with a continuous warning chime UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE Vehicle Not in Park LEFT RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph LEFT RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR one or more with EZ a single chime if speed is above 1 mph DOOR S AJAR with a single chime if vehicle is in motion LOW WASHER FLUID with a single chime OIL CHANGE REQUIRED with a single chime SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM with a single chime SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM COOLANT LOW LIFTGATE OPEN CHECK TPM
203. elected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the RESET button until All DR 1st appears MEM RECALL WITH RKE YES When ON is selected pressing the unlock button on the RKE will recall the memory settings for the seat mirror and radio To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears e SOUND HORN W LOCK gt YES When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears FLASH LAMPS w LOCK gt YES When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY gt 0 SEC When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the head lamps remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears NOTE The head l
204. en the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Heat Floor Outside air flows primarily through the floor out lets located under the instrument panel A small amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets b Mix Qt e Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlet Defrost W Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlet located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 255 Temperature Control The temperature of the air is controlled by a slide located on the top center of the control panel Move the slide left or right to change the temperature The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures 81228299 Rear Temperature Control If Equipped Rotating this knob left to the REAR CONTROL position allows the passengers in the second and third row seats to control the blower speed and temperature by means of the rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as described und
205. en the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 210 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Commu nication UConnect in Section 3 for more information If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available
206. ency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WINDOWS windows will operate only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and for ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or the driver s door is opened This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer B Power Windows NOTE The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for ten minutes after the ignition it turned OFF WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the Window Switches ignition A child could operate power windows The control on the left front door has up down switches other controls or move the vehicle that give you finger tip control of all four power win dows There is a single opening and closing switch on the passenger doors for passenger window control The 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Auto Down The driver s and front passenger window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and
207. ent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Call Continuation UConnect System Features Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is available on the vehicle can be any one of three types USING E e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue M s i eae on the UConnect system either until the callends or e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the name of the language you wish to switch to the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the English Espanol or Francais if so equipped call dhemam Phone e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue language selection on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile ph
208. eplace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open amp close the door UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for 2 sec onds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for 2 seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each
209. eplace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam age to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 CAUTION WARNING e Always check the depth of the standing water before e Driving through standing water limits your vehi driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through stand
210. er Rear Zone Control Rotating this knob to the OFF position turns off the rear climate controls Rotating this knob to the right of the OFF position allows the Driver and front passenger to control the rear blower speed and the rear temperature using the front temperature slide The mode front or rear is always controlled by the front mode control For example Panel REAR e P uim OFFe REAR CONTROL 80a01401 256 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M mode on the front control will give you air from the outlets in the headliner in the rear Floor mode in the front will give you floor in the rear MANUAL ERE PUE yc Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window re MEE E Washer Wiper d ONO REAR OFF See the Rear Window Features section of this book Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The control can be turned on by pressing the POWER knob When the control is turned on it will be in the last mode prior to being turned off Pressing the POWER knob again will turn off the control The control can also be turned on by pressing any button and it will display the corresponding operation mode for that button 81965314 ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 257 Automatic Control The ATC system can maintain a steady comfort level in various weather conditions with a simple operation e Select your desired temperature setting by pressing the or side of the TEMP rocker switches
211. er cord is located at the front of the engine compartment near the radiator cap The 5 7L engine block heater cord is located on the left side of the engine compartment and rearward of the power distribution center WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear selected The selector lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column To drive move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the desired drive position Pull selector lever toward you when shifting into Reverse Second First or Park or when shifting out of Park Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of PARK Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or Neutral position into another gear range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 P Park Supplements parking brake by locking the transmission Engine can be started in this range Never use Park while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place
212. ery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Required Maintenance Intervals e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and NOTE Vehicles built with the 4 7L engine are add as needed equipped with sixteen spark plugs one set is located on the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is Check all lights and other electrical it f t e Check all lights and other electrical items for correc located on the sid saf the enewe operation At Each Oil Change The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard plug and must be change every 30 000 miles 50 000 km e Change the engine oil filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a e Inspect the brake hoses and lines premium plug and must be changed every 102 000 miles e Check the Manual Transmission fluid level 170 000 km EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 Rotate Tires 6 000 10 000 6 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner 12 000 20 000 12 filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 12 000
213. esigned to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Auto matic Locking Mode earlier in this section Second Row Seat Tether Anchors Child Restraints in Third Row Seating If Equipped For vehicles equipped with third row split bench 60 40 seating the tether strap anchorage is located on the seat en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 back behind the center seating position The hooks in the rear floor are NOT designed to withstand the forces that may occur during a crash WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind
214. ety of others system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes The system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency WARNING braking conditions This can help reduce braking dis WEENING tances The BAS complements the antilock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired e BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 298 STARTING AND OPERATING EE TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel
215. facturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http wwwssafercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washing ton DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and
216. filter and spin on cooler return 120 000 200 000 120 filter if equipped 4 7L 5 7L engines only Replace Accessory Drive Belt s 120 000 200 000 120 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Bi Reporting Safety Defects 05 456 Vehicle ia m REESE REX ex S 452 The Cada im p E cece ec cote 456 Prepare For The Appointment lt i lt 2 s lt 4 452 Bl Publication Order Forms 00 457 Pr pare A EISES io ds ee eee e ARCA 452 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 452 Quality Grades se ee ret nes 458 H if You Need Assistance l l 452 Treadwear lees Bl Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 455 Traction Grades lt eese ce Re la Mopar Parts cies sore ex ter ees 455 Temperature Grades 452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you T
217. for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set 238 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words User Clock are displayed The GPS time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this featur
218. for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voicemail systems have system timeout settings too short that may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you
219. ft e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire
220. g your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate WARNING Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle A loaded vehicle is shown in the following example Note that neither
221. gin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones 224 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press t
222. gs HI and LOW Press the switch once to obtain high heat level then press the switch again to obtain low heat level Pressing the switch a third time will turn the heated seats off If you do not purposefully turn the switch off the seat heating level will automatically change to the next lower level or 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M off Both of the indicators on identifies High heat level The lower indicator on only identifies Low heat level VAE NOTE The high heat setting will operate for approxi Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin mately 30 minutes After 30 minutes the system will because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes automatically transition to the low heat setting The low spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus heat setting will operate for 30 minutes then the system tion or other physical condition must exercise care will turn off when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long If the low heat setting is initially selected the system will periods of time operate for 30 minutes and then turn off Do not place anything on the seat that insulates If the indicator lamp on the heated seat switch does not against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may light an indicator blinks when the switch is depressed or cause the seat heater to overheat if the heated seats do not operate the system should be service
223. h to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 4 km h Automatic Door Lock Programming This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and Close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Within 10 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON position a minimum of four times ending in the LOC
224. he CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 modes SCAN Button Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the Radio to the Radio mode E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 217 RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran
225. he Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 6 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Flash Lamps with Lock Programming e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob 2 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the LOCK button within 6 seconds 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Using the Panic Alarm To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is O
226. he device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are have any problems or require assistance EZ please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof control is located between the sun visors on the overhead console Pressing the open end of the rocker switch once moves the panel to a comfort stop position Pressing the switch a second time causes the panel to continue moving rearward up to the full open position To close the panel the close end of the switch must be pressed and held Pressing the vent button from a fully closed position raises the trailing edge of the panel f
227. he first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING
228. he rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format types Program Type 16 E p No program type or un Penal None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 225 Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk
229. he time button alter nates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the AM FM CD single disc radio only one of the two time or frequency is displayed Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately 5 seconds ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 205 RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during t
230. hors and Tether for CHildren LATCH ieu e yk ERHEBEN E rr p 68 Lubrication Body sese mariiu 401 hug Nuts desc meter deeem eerte dS 373 Luggage Carrier llle 183 Lumbar Support ssess 116 Maintenance Free Battery 05 397 Maintenance Procedures 0 000000 391 Maintenance Schedule 444 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 201 388 Manual Service 0 0 0 es 457 Manual Transmission Lubricant Selection 0 000 eee eae 441 Map Reading Lights 158 159 Memory Seat o crece ders e cR dob ae a Re e a 131 Mirrors 22333 teri 64 5 a6 bu PhS ee Goo erus 83 Automatic Dimming 00 83 87 Electric Powered 0 0 0 eee eae 85 Heated eic ace edhe eae ae OR DCN 87 MemOEy sce cag os ae eee CLE oo i SEES 131 Outside Luci edu uuu ant d Ged Cee ER ENTER DR 84 RearvieW aded Ree det se honed enwhin 83 MAP ac sient ha c doe dodo ota e 86 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 325 Mopar Parts siens roae auias a ee eee ee eee 390 455 MP3 Playet csc a REG 206 236 Multi Displacement Engine System 304 Multi Function Control Lever 142 Navigation Radio i odd b idee taimis 236 Navigation System llle 156 236 New Vehicle Break In Period 0 74 Occupant Restraints sie 2c RR e 39 Octane Rating Gasoline Fu
231. ht part of the frame prior to inboard transition Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench the tube exten sion may be used but is not required Front Jacking Location 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME When changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as posssible with the drive tubes extending to the rear Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench Rear Right Jacking Location Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 81316de4 4 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the Rear Left Jacking Location vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack tools and the extra tire and wheel 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid risk of forcing the vehic
232. hut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob lems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transpon der fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the
233. if equipped set the Mode control at J If sunny set the Mode control at or Z4 and for snowy or very cold weather requiring extra heat to the windshield use 33 In most cases turning on the Air Conditioning press the button will clear the fog Adjust temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As it gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield If so set the Mode control at 3 or and adjust temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging If equipped with AUTO you must manually press the Defrost button to clear fog Defrost mode is not a feature of the Automatic Temperature Control B19653ed 266 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer 811a5530 818fa09b A rotating switch located on the climate control panel turns the rear wiper On or Off Pressing the rotating switch inward activates the rear window washer Rotating the switch will enable one of five intermittent delay times for the rear wiper The delay times range from 20 to 1 second If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume operation Rear Window Defrosting se A push button type switch is l
234. ight in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed NOTE Ifthe security light stays on continuously during vehicle operation have the system checked by your dealer To Disarm the System Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the doors If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The security system will also disarm if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key If an unpro grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle the engine will start and run for 2 seconds and then shut down After six unsuccessul attempts at starting the engine the system will shut down until the correct key is used To exit alarming mode press the RKE Unlock button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key The security alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit NOTE You may accidentally activate the security sys tem horn sounds and lights flash by entering the vehicle without using the key fob to unlock the door s The security system can be disarm
235. ight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation Continuous steady brake pedal pressure results in optimal braking power while maintaining the ability to steer the vehicle In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal In this manner only can the ABS be most effective On slippery road surfaces the ABS will respond even with light brake pedal pressure because of the increased likelihood of locking wheels The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 WARNING Anti Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated elec tronic equipment It may be susceptible to interfer ence caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be done by qualified professionals WARNING Pumping of the
236. ights taillights side marker lights license plate light and instrument panel lights are all turned on The headlights will turn ON when the switch is rotated to the second position Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Illuminated Entry Headlights turn on for 90 seconds when the Remote Keyless Entry UNLOCK button is pressed The Illuminated Entry time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Illuminated Aprch under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Daytime Running Lights Canada Only The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started This provides a constant Lights ON condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at reduced intensity If the parking brake is
237. inal equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability EN STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING CAUTION e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen sion dimensions and performance characteristics resulting in changes to steering handling and brak ing of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable hardline and stress to steering and Senn Alignment And Balance components You could lose control and have an Poor suspension alignment may result in mm accident resulting in serious injury or death Use may result in false speedometer and odometer readings e Fast tire wear only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided Never use a tire with a smaller load index or wear capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load e Vehicle pull to right or left index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having for proper diagnosis adequate speed capability can res
238. ine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacture only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low tempera ture starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location see the Engine Compartment illustration in this section NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System MDS Refer to Multi Displacement System under Starting 2m and Operating for more details Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives
239. ing water This will minimize wave effects Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your ve hicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears con taminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME PARKING BRAKE The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the pa
240. ions 7 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the transmitters 8 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 9 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory posi tion using the other numbered memory button or to link another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to memory ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 NOTE Achime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason Memory Position Recall NOTE e The driver s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall memory positions e The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory posi tions e Not all motors may be moved at one time Please refer to the 8 way power seat description To recall the memory settings for driver one press memory button number 1 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press memory button number 2 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 or pressing any one of the power seat buttons or pressing the adjustable pedals button or pressing either the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry trans mitter when not in the ignition switch When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat and the pe
241. ippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle See Recreational Towing for more infor mation 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Shifting Procedure NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case 8197509c NOTE The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between 4WD 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation a position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning NOTE Delayed shifting out of the 4WD LOCK position may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped USE EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine RUNNING slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the pos
242. is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the lifteate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close However vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers knee bolsters front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and left and right side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat If you are required to drive with the liftgate open belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature
243. is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 208 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the s
244. ission into Park P Shifting OUT of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut engine OFF 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine 4 Depress brake pedal 5 Shift automatic transmission to Neutral N 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case Neutral N button for 1 second 7 After the Neutral N indicator light turns off release the Neutral N button 8 After the Neutral N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch 9 Shift automatic transmission into Park P 10 Start the engine 11 Shift automatic transmission into Drive D NOTE Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral N selection button and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to depress ing the Neutral N button or are no longer met during 364 STARTING AND OPERATING EE the 1 second time then all of the position indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral N button is released NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not On the shift will not t
245. ite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 249 REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF Right Hand Switch Functions EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right hand e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume controls are rocker type switches with a push button in the center of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the switches e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume e Press the button in the center of the switch to change modes i e AM FM etc Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation mm e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to the next preset that you have programmed BACK VIEW OF STEERING WHEEL 818fcae7 Remote Sound Controls 250 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD Operation
246. ith Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged some loss of braking effectiveness This will be evident by before driving failure to do so can lead to brake increased pedal travel during application greater pedal failure and an accident force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Lamp and the ABS Lamp during brake use Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS number of reasons A child or others could be The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse the ignition A child could operate power win braking conditions The system operates with a separate dows other controls or move the vehicle computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ME surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel sl
247. ith a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed Connects a vehicle and fifth wheel trailer with a coupling king pin Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Duty Fifth Wheel Greater than 10 000 Ibs Gooseneck 4540 kg All trailer
248. ition indicator light has stopped flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the position indicator light has stopped flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five 5 seconds and retry the shift DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 3 R
249. itions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Control 811a5530 The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather The following describes its operation 252 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Air Conditioning Operation To turn the air conditioning On or Off perform the following steps Position the mode control button to the desired airflow setting e Set the front blower control to any desired speed e Press the Snowflake A C button which is located to the right of the temperature control slide An indicator light on the Snowflake A C button shows that the air conditioning is On Press the Snowflake A C button a second time to turn the air conditioning Off NOTE The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for several seconds Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the com pressor cycles This is a normal occurrence since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and improve fuel economy Front Blower Con
250. ituations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick
251. iver 4 The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control is SET Adjustable Pedals Switch The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to the steering wheel and pedals es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over accelerator opera tion at speeds greater than refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine The controls are mounted on the steering wheel ON OFF RESUME CRUISE CANCEL SET DECEL 818fa2a1 To Activate NOTE The Vehicle Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch buttons i e SET and CANCEL are operated simulta neously in order to ensure proper operation The System 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON OFF button and re establishing the desired vehicle SET speed Push the ON OFF button to the ON position In the instrument cluster the word CRUISE illuminates when the system is on To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicl
252. k button To enable the window controls press the window control button again Window Lockout Switch LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE When the engine is running from a Remote Start if equipped the vehicle must first be unlocked by pressing the remote transmitter UNLOCK button prior to activating the Power Liftgate otherwise the engine will stop automatically 81a7f544 Power Liftgate Button Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed To open the liftgate pull the exterior handle and open the liftgate with one fluid motion The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h NOTE If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate pressing the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate becom ing unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area The liftgate will re lock automati cally within 10 seconds once the liftgate is closed Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter Press the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is ful
253. l should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil
254. l the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Rear 60 40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point Belt If Equipped The center three point seat belt for the third row rear seat may be disconnected to allow the 6076 seat back to easily fold down The keyed buckle latch plate small latch plate at the end of the belt can be detached from the keyed seat belt buckle buckle without a red release button located on the left inboard side of the third row bench seat Insert the ignition key into the center white slot on the keyed buckle The small latchplate can be removed when the key is pressed into the buckle Allow the retractor to take up the surplus webbing and insert the latch plates into the slots in the headliner for storage while the 6076 seat back is folded down 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING e If the small keyed buckle latch plate and keyed buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide the proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When r
255. laying compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player 216 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS BEEN EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If t
256. le has a recommended cold parked for more than 3 hours placard of 33 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approxi mately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will still be ON In this situa tion the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor es STARTING AND OPERATING 327 NOTE e Seasonal temperature
257. le off the jack do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts 6 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the nuts in a crisscross pattern Correct nut tightness is 135 10 ft Ibs 183 14 N m dynamic torque If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station in the places provided 7 Remove wheel blocks Do not install chrome or alu minum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position Stow the mu replaced tire jack and tools as previously described 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME To Stow The Flat Or Spare WARNING Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle position it properly across the wheel opening e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow aaa the roadway as possible Before raising the with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposit
258. led options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough sla
259. length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Reconfiguring Power Outlets To reconfigure the outlets be sure the ignition is OFF before removing the fuse The reconfigurable fuse loca tion is a special design that allows the fuse to be installed in two different ways If the fuse is located in the Upper or Top Position the outlets will work at all times If the fuse is located in the Lower or Bottom Position the power outlets will only work when the ignition is ON NOTE The fuse block is located in the left side kick panel behind a removable cover near the park brake pedal A fuse puller is attached to the inside surface of the fuse panel cover to aid in removing fuses if necessary YELLOW AIRBAG FUSES TOP FUSE BLOCK 20A RECON FIGURABLE FUSE LOCATION BATTERY TOP LOCATION IGN BOTTOM POSITION 817e7f62 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 FLOOR CONSOLE Floor Console Features The Floor Console between the driver s and front pas senger s seat has the following features Miscellaneous storage compartments Flexible cup holder inserts Portable phone storage bin Portable phone cord routing between lid and base on forward edge 12 Volt reconfigurable power outlet inside storage compartment Side open armrest lid Tissue holder amp pen holder Coin slots Removable CD bin
260. leted and the Neutral N light comes on release Neutral N button 8 Start engine 9 Shift automatic transmission into Reverse R 10 Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive D 12 Turn ignition key to the unlocked OFF position 13 Shift automatic transmission into Park P 14 Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar NOTE Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral N selection button and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements with the exception of 3 Key ON are not met prior to depressing the Neutral N button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer then the Neutral N indicator light will flash continu ously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral N button is released NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into Park P with the transfer case in Neutral N and the engine RUNNING With the transfer case in Neutral N ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transm
261. lets 0 00 177 Electronic Brake Control System 295 Anti Lock Brake System 0 295 Brake Assist System 2 0 2 2 00000005 296 Electronic Roll Mitigation 298 Electronic Stability Program 299 Traction Control System lille 298 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 298 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 149 Electronic Stability Program ESP 200 299 Electronic Vehicle Information Center VIC ua Rwkeseuqqoexv qaa te cede 156 159 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 377 Jacking siacesreig Goes aa hs tyne dea ie Eo nd 370 Tow Hooks 0 00 cee ee ees 377 TOWNS ceres oan de Oed Rana d md 378 Emission Control System Maintenance 444 Emission Related Components 409 Engine Air Cleaner 225236 one REX TG Cx PA 395 Block Heater 43122 et wee EE EROR 276 Break In Recommendations 74 Compartment 2s eisan eee b iisi 385 386 Coolant Antifreeze 000000000 440 Exhaust Gas Caution 39 75 336 Fails to Statt 4a EP eA eh hoe ES 274 Flooded Starting sse kem mam ane 274 Fuel Requirements 45229 nes re 439 Jump Starting sede kx mmo RR a 375 Multi Displacement sssaaa oema a ea 304 en INDEX 467 Oil seen acetates gas MEM De 391 439 440 Oil Filler Cap egens 384 385 386 393 Oil Selectioft esa ca a Rea BO 393 439 Oil
262. limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs en STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at t
263. line Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components NOTE 4 7L Engine If Equipped is now rated for E85 Ethanol use Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 For more information refer to Flexible Fuel in this section Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac turer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you
264. ll be heard 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 12 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional fobs 13 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 14 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed fobs function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the key fob is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal g Transmitter Battery Replacement 81182072 2 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol Avoid touching the new battery ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deteriora tion If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the transmitter case snap the two halves of
265. ll turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system is determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 sec onds and
266. ll within five seconds of shifting from Park into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION NV 140 Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions If Equipped The NV 140 is a single speed HI range only transfer case which provides convenient full time 4 wheel drive No driver interaction is required This transfer case divides engine torque almost evenly with 48 percent of engine torque to the front axle and 52 percent of engine torque to the rear axle Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 4WD Normal Four Wheel Drive High Range Employs inter axle differential Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds All road surfaces NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions The NV 244 Generation II is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch which is located on the instrument panel The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides 4 mode positions Normal four wheel drive 4WD high range four wheel drive lock AWD LOCK four wheel drive low 4WD LOW range and neutral N This transfer case is eq
267. lling the bulb straight out 811a88d9 811a88cc 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx License Lights 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise 1 Remove the two screws securing the lens to the liftgate 3 Pull bulb from socket MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 Center High Mounted Stoplight 2 Turn socket 1 4 counterclockwise and free from hous 1 Remove two screws securing stoplight housing assem TIE bly to the liftgate e 811a88f0 3 Pull bulb straight from socket to remove 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Fog Lights To replace the left foglamp bulb 1 Remove the three wheel liner screws 2 Remove the remove the far left air dam screw at the bottom of the fascia 3 Peel back the liner and access the foglamp 4 Rotate the socket and connector 1 4 turn counter clockwise and pull straight reward to disengage from the lamp 5 Remove the bulb from the socket and replace The right foglamp can be accessed from below the vehicle Follow the previous steps 4 and 5 of the left foglamp to replace the bulb NOTE These are Halogen bulbs Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat build up which reduces bulb life es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel 3 7L 4 7L 87 Octane 27 Gal 102L 5 7L 89 Octane 27 Gal 102L Engine Oil with filter
268. llision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Second Row 40 20 40 Seat Fold and Tumble The 40 20 40 seat configuration is standard on all mod els This seat is equipped with a unique fold and tumble feature The 40 seatbacks have spring loaded hinges which assist with the folding of the seatbacks Fold Tumble and Recline Lever Second row leather seats have seatback recliners at the 40 seating positions Raising the lever allows the seat back to be reclined an additional 11 degrees 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Fold the 40 seatbacks fully raise the lever on the side of the seat to release the seatback The seatback can now be folded into the down position for use as a cargo floor or the seat can now be tumbled forward to allow access to the rear of the vehicle Rear 20 Seat Pull Strap To fold the 2076 seatback pull the strap forward to release the seatback Fold the seatback down for use as an armrest or to carry cargo When returning the seatback to the upright position push the seatback rearward to latch the seatback Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position WARNING The 20 seatback contains the center shoulder belt A 20 seatback that is not fully latched in the upright position will not protect you properly es UND
269. loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 234 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 se
270. lt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child slouching can move the belt out of position restraint e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety child to put the shoulder belt under an arm Standards The manufacturer recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will WARNING use it before you buy it Improper installation can lead to failure of an The restraint must be appropriate for your child s infant or child restraint It could come loose ina weight and height Check the label on the restraint for collision The child could be badly injured or weight and height limits killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex Carefully follow the instructions that come with the actly when installing an infant or child
271. ltale Lamp 1X The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will sef illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your v
272. ly open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING When the remote keyless entry transmitter button is pressed two times and the Lamp Flash feature is enabled the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the switch located on the overhead console 2 Power Liftgate Switch During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away A beeping signal will sound two seconds before the liftgate starts to open or close NOTE If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The power liftgate must be in the full open position in order to power close If the liftgate is not fully open press the remote keyless entry transmitter or overhead console button to fully open the liftgate and then press again to close If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
273. mal conditions the use of REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IR M 2 METHOD ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gaso
274. ment System If Equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Day Night Mirror Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of truck The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head light glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated This option also controls the driver side mirror when it is equipped with auto dimming glass 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee a Automatic Dimming Mirror 817892c4 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Folding exterior mirrors are hinge
275. mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively operating 23 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system B which monitors the emissions and engine control system If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 10 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condi tion investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 201 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 24 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflat
276. mes If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and mp3 wma tracks the radio will only play the mp3 wma tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 233 MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency KHz Bit rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 WMA Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Bit Rate kbps WMA 44 1 and 48 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is
277. mode is desired the button must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included in all automatic transmissions A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Over drive and in Drive NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL button will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive NOTE If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refi
278. n wrap around mode So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list you just turn the TUNE SCROLL knob backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode the radio preset buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e 1 Playlists e 2 Artists e 3 Albums e 4 Genres e 5 Audiobooks e 6 Podcasts After pressing a preset button you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line 244 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS EE To exit the List mode without selecting a track press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode LIST Button Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu of the iPod This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the TUNE SCROLL knob This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod and you can follow the same the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE Button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display scr
279. n Such materials might be motion grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions e Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the Maintenance Free Battery 7o vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob maintenance required tained immediately 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the ba
280. n Tire 04 305 Safety TIPS okeene ea xa as pd sod Soda aus 75 Satellite Radio iss 206 207 236 237 244 Satellite Radio Antenna 0 248 Schedule Maintenance lesen 444 Seat Belt Maintenance 004 419 Seat Belt Reminder 0 000 50 Seat Bells 25b dC Peer A ead 39 40 76 And Pregnant Women llle 52 Child Restraint ss s ra o pure iin ea i 64 65 Extender aa a alter acts Str ch seal eters A E tn 52 Front Seat 476 INDEX EE PretenSIOTIetS o r oun a Tod E ae as ORC tendi 50 Reminder 229m n RR dete eee ES 194 DEAS 235 4X EU Eg ais Grow S E AA RR Rare AON aps 114 Adjustment ssl eee 114 ClCAnIN Sc tia sein Ste oa oU tens d EHE AD a REN 417 Fold and Tumble Rear 121 123 Heated gies e405 RR PEE ue RR 118 Lumbar Support 00 000 0006 116 MEMO aeara uuo dnce ees d ouod aU 131 Rear Folding 4 be mer mA 121 123 Reclinitie 2o aas ecu a eu pen 115 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 195 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 404 440 Selectiotr oF Oll zs kou oe keane coe wad 393 Sentry Key Immobilizer lisse 13 Sentry Key Programming sess 15 Sentry Key Replacement 15 Service and Maintenance 391 444 Service Assistance 0 ee eee ee eee 452 Service Contract x suu dca KEK ee dee oe ee ae d 454 Service Manuals 0
281. n Bluetooth on mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency En9lish Phonebook edia A e mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Setup Phonebook Flowchart Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Y at a time Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Enter Number Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Prompts UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Setup Confirmation Prompts on off Say 4 digit pin code Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing New oe Select a language wi i English Espanol tem
282. n severity and occupant size This vehicle is also equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The window bags are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the window bags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol
283. n the Power Distribution Center PDC The LO D cavity includes a snap in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain e As an alternative to the above steps you may discon nect the negative cable from the battery 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Dome Light esee me ns Not Serviceable Liftgate Lamp rere taeda ree ber xU EY 567 Overhead Console Lights Not Serviceable Reading Light Not Serviceable Visor Vanity Lights Not Serviceable LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Headlight cer RR n H13 Front Park Turn seeeeeeeen 3457AK Back Up ise toca Gig dale ae oP eec mess Oed s 3057 Center High Mounted Stoplight 921 Front Side Marker 0 0 0 0 00 cee eens 168 bog Lampir ss eoa uh aas e Oe 3 9006LL License Plate Light cera rune 168 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Side Marker 3057 BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights Parking Turn Signal 1 Remove the two bolts attaching the headlight to the upper fender reinforcement hood must be open to access bolts ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 2 Remove one nut that attaches the headlight to the inner fender panel Access to the nut is possible by opening the fender panel access door which is located
284. n the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles of operation This is a normal part of the break in and is not an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust System WARNING Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an ex tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless To avoid inhaling these gases the following
285. nagement or brake thermal model 19 Transmission Temperature Indicator This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEU TRAL until the light goes off INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 199 20 Electronic Throttle Control ETC This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 21 BRAKE System Warning Light The red BRAKE warning light will come on when the ignition key is first turned on and stay on briefly as a bulb check If the bulb does not come on during starting 200 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME have the bulb repaired promptly If the light stays on it may be an indication tha
286. ne coolant and may plug the radiator HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology This vehicle has not been designed for use with e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propy and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap t
287. ners on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system WARNING e Never add fuel when the engine is running e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled mEEE X STARTING AND OPERATING 339 FLEXIBLE FUEL IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by the uniq
288. nsmitters Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your vehicle Additional fobs can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob NOTE When entering program mode using that fob all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle Use the Following procedure to program additional key fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seatbelt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this program ming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob E 6 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All fobs that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard 8 Using the fob to be programmed press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simultaneously 9 A single chime will be heard 10 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the UNLOCK button on the fob 11 A single chime wi
289. nty Information 455 Washer Adding Fluid 384 385 386 Washers Windshield 146 Washing Vehicle ssc ceca seen mec Ro e a 416 Water Driving Through 000000 288 Weight Load Carrying 04 343 Wheel Alignment and Balance 321 Wheel and Wheel Trim l l 417 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care naaa 417 Wheel Changing ike dh eg ex eed 368 Wheel Mounting 000002 a ee 370 Wheel Nut lotque d d e ERU ARS 373 Wind Buffeting llle 176 Window Fogging lees 264 Windows aue E Rear dti Oe ale des Geen 33 POW T i222 d e SOR D UR PETTY Lx 33 Windshield Defroster lus 254 259 Windshield Washers 144 146 402 Fluid 4s iib RES 144 384 385 386 402 Windshield Wiper Blades 401 Windshield Wipers 0 0000000 e 144 Wiper Blade Replacement 401 Wiper REAT s siu ere doa Pe E deb CR RC RC d 266 Wipers Intermittent lt e sad zie see ERA 144 Wrecker TOWING eec RR exo 378 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 417
290. ny of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The airbag light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the airbag control mod ule may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your dealer if the fuse is good 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Event Data Recorder EDR EDR will be activated on Front Side and roll over events In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2
291. o cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scald ing or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the coolant in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle dipstick The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it
292. o put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone depend
293. o select the following format types Program Type 16 E p No program type or un Penal None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 213 Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes 214 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND
294. o the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blankSentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the indicator light will turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Ke
295. o the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s second row seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now available However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All
296. ocated in the climate control panel Press the switch and the rear win dow defroster and electric remote control heated mirrors if equipped will turn On An amber indicator on the push button will light when the defroster is turned On An symbol will be displayed when the defroster is turned on with an ATC control Push again to turn Off prior to time out The defroster will automatically turn Off after fifteen minutes For ten more minutes of operation push the button again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 267 CAUTION Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures liliis 273 NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating Automatic Transmission ss 273 Tron HOU J DICCAMMDBS sate aise Normal Starting 000 273 ae on 2 idi NM E H Engine Block Heater If Equipped 276 li Deriving On Slippery Surfaces esce iret Bl Automatic Transmission 000 276 Mi Driving Through Water 288 Automatic Transmission ls 276 Flowing
297. on NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 16 Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined 17 Fog Light Indicator O This light shows when the fog lights are ON 18 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedom eter area illuminates with the key in the igni tion switch turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running The ESP TCS Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light becomes illuminated when the ESP Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially available caused by lack of engine ma
298. on or CONTROL IN REAR for ATC The rear blower switch has an Off position and a range of blower speeds Rotating the rear blower control clock wise will increase the blower speed Rear Rotary Temperature Control The second row seat occupants have contorl of the rear temperature only when the front control unit is in the REAR CONTROL position To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature control knob to the right or left The blue area indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 263 NOTE For best operation make sure that ventilation grilles located in the rear storage area are not obstructed by stowed articles Front Unit to Rear Unit Chart If the Front Control is selected Rear Airflow will come from Panel Headliner Bi Level Headliner Floor Floor Mix Floor Defrost Floor Operating Tips Fast Cooldown For a fast cooldown set the blower fan to the highest setting set the mode control to the panel fresh position press the snowflake button to turn on the air condition ing and drive with the windows open for the first few minutes Once the hot air has been expelled close the windows and set the mode selector to the Recirculation panel or Recirculation Bi level position When a comfort able condition has been reached choose a mode position 264 INSTRUMENT PANEL
299. onal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the m instrument panel Hood Release Lever 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Then push the safety latch lever to the left It is located edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage between the grille and hood opening right of the center Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged NOTE Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip before closing hood to prevent damage to grille WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving Hood Safety Catch To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 LIGHTS 81b01c8a 9196c9da Headlight Switch Headlight Switch Location 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Lights 81b01c83 Dimmer Control Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is
300. one After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency s
301. ont tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle 378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING CAUTION Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for death tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle WARNING TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent Tow straps and chains may break causing serious damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom injury mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable tow with the transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km If the vehicle is to be towed more than 1
302. or or by looking at the indicating the range of the object display above the rear window The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle Rear Park Assist LED s 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED 8th LED 6 in 15 cm 11 81 in 30 cm Red OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED 78 7 in 200 cm Yellow None 2nd LED 51 1 in 130 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 45 2 in 115 cm Yellow None 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 3 in 100 cm Yellow None 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm Yellow None 6th LED 20 in 50 cm 27 6 in 70 cm Yellow None 7th LED 16 in 40 cm 19 7 in 50 cm Red at 12 in 30 cm Intermittent at 8 in 20 cm Continuous NOTE The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING CAUTION e Drivers must be careful when backing up even e The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid when using the Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots befo
303. or ventilation When the panel is venting pressing the close end or the rocker switch returns it to the closed position Both opening and closing operations in the vent mode occur only while the switch is held NOTE The sunroof will continue to operate for ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until the driver door is opened This feature may be disabled by your authorized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a Express Open Feature During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature To close the sunroof hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed forward again To close fully hold the switch in the forward position until the glass movement has stopped The sunshade can be opened manually It will also open as the sunroof opens The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 176 UNDERSTANDING
304. ot recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phone book UConnect phone book nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phone book es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows and 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e dry weather condition e operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain i
305. other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized dealer for service At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition Improper ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 CAUTION belt tension can cause
306. ou to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of 5 times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components 230 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject
307. our Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access with REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will display Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits display The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed 246 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME ESN SID Access with RAQ and RAK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access with REC Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the radio off press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta neously until the 12 digits of the ESN SID appear on the screen Selecting Satellite Mode in REF RAQ and RAK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the
308. out overdrive by pressing the TOW HAUL button located at the end of the gear shifter WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The manufacturer suggest disabling the Rear Park Assist System when towing a trailer Refer to Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in section 3 of this Owner Manual This system is used to help drivers determine if an obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside mirrors es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in LEDs one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the rear bumper Objects can be detected from up to 78 7 the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind inches 200 cm A warning display above the rear the right rear of the vehicle The driver can view the LEDs window provides both visible and audible warnings either through the rear view mirr
309. p Function features TRIP Shows the total distance traveled since the last reset To reset the TRIP function press and hold the RESET button ELAPSED TIME Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or START positions UNIT IN US METRIC Press the RESET button to toggle between US and METRIC AVG MPG Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Example If your Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays 18 AVG MPG and the RESET button is pressed the previous averaging history will be erased and the display will return to the 18 AVG MPG not to 0 AVG MPC The display may take several miles for the value to change dependent upon driving habits If equipped with a 5 7L engine and MDS Multi Displacement System FUEL SAVER may be displayed along with the actual AVG MPG If equipped with Multi Displacement Engine System MDS option the EVIC will display FUEL SAVER when in fuel economy mode MI TO EMPTY Distance To Empty Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of fuel economy according to the current fu
310. pen holder e Second row heated seat switches if equipped es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 FACTORY INSTALLED ROOF LUGGAGE RACK 8122a58d Rear Floor Console To access the storage bin lift up on the console door latch The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 68 kg 150 Ibs and should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The side rails between the stantions should be used to tie down cargo Check the straps frequently to be sure that iind csi the load remains securely attached To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not NOTE Crossbars are offered by Mopar accessories exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and External racks do not increase the total load carrying secure the load appropriately capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearb
311. placement Tires ss agasan aenak 320 Alignment And Balance 321 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 ll Supplemental Tire Pressure Information If Equipped acca seat can ds ere SUR ane 322 Ba Tire Chains esene eis seh oak eder ee ae 322 BM Snow Tires i yeep geese ceased x 323 li Tire Rotation Recommendations 324 li Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS If Equipped secie ge ES d Rara dei que 325 Base System If Equipped 327 Premium System If Equipped 329 General Information sess 332 H Fuel Requirements 000 ce eeee 332 Reformulated Gasoline 333 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 333 MMT In Gasoline 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000 334 Materials Added To Fuel Fuel System Cautions Carbon Monoxide Warnings ll Adding Fuel Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Loose Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Message ll Flexible Fuel If Equipped E 85 General Information Ethanol Fuel E 85 Fuel Requirements Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles Starting 272 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Cruising Range i coach roe eR as Fs d Replacement Parts 000000 Maintenance llle H Vehicle Loading iain rx ROCCO Certification Label llle Curb W
312. player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections easy store presets backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Radio Specific User s Manual for detailed operating instructions ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 207 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Radio Specific User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure Setting the Clock 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward
313. ploy the seat belt pretensioners alone e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity The steer ing wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions or in a roll over event When the ORC with side impact option de tects a collision or roll over requiring the window bags to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle Both Window Bags will inflate in a roll over event A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated
314. pointing or left pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the direction of the turn These indicators also indicate proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal check for a defective bulb If either indicator fails to light up when the lever is moved check for a defective fuse or turn signal LED A single chime is activated when the 194 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se left right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM vehicle speed greater than 15 mph 24 km h for more than one mile 4 Low Fuel Warning Light This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1 16 of a tank or less 5 High Beam Indicator E Indicates that headlights are on high beam 6 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light comes on for several seconds after the ignition is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled If this light flashes it indicates a fault in the airbag system Have the system checked by an authorized dealer 7 Coolant Temperature Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi ART tion For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle shift into N Neutral and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3 minutes If the temperature reading does not return to normal seek authorized service immediately
315. porarily or Francais System Lists override Prones Selber prone List Ph es to be deleted Is ongs P i System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 111 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial Six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language redial list names return to main menu return or main menu list phones select phone select mobile send mute set up phone settings or phone mute off set up new entry towing assistance no transfer call pager UConnect Tutorial pair a phone try again phone pairing pairing voice training phonebook phone book work previous yes record again 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions
316. position to all other positions For a good signal the display will place a box around the selected transmission range PRND21 If the PRNDL displays only the char acters PRND21 no boxes have the system checked by an authorized dealer 15 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven Therefore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 197 The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the Trip Odometer button To reset a trip odometer display the desired trip odom eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets approximately 2 seconds Vehicle Warning Messages For non Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles and the appropriate conditions exist messages such as door ajar indicates that a door s may be ajar gASCAP which indicates that your gas cap is possibly loose or damaged CHANgE OIL indicates that the engine oil should be change Lo WASH low washer fluid and noFUSE indicates that the IOD fuse is removed from the
317. promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system es STARTING AND OPERATING 337 CAUTION WARNING A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near Indicator Light to turn on the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is CAUTION in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the malfunction indicator To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top light to turn on off the fuel tank after filling oe NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly fuel tank is full tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas contai
318. r Maintenance 399 Front Suspension Ball Joints 400 Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints 401 Body Lubrication 0 0 0 0 0 0 401 Windshield Wiper Blades 401 Windshield And Rear Window Washers 402 Exhaust System anc due algae Va aed 402 Cooling System a css eder RE 8 403 Emission Related Components 409 Brake System ius dte cues rece aua dpa 410 Automatic Transmission ss 411 Transfer Case llle 414 nod MP 414 Appearance Care And Protection From CONOS ar eR dne WEEE dr RR re 415 B Fuse Block 2 2 02 cee 420 Fuses Interior 2 llis 421 Fuses Power Distribution Center 424 Fuses Integrated Power Module 427 W Vehicle Storage 12e hr e e 429 Bl Replacement Light Bulbs 430 W Bulb Replacement oue eth cx ORC aves 430 Headlights Parking Turn Signal 430 Rear Side Marker Tail Lights Turn Signals And Backup Lights Replacement 432 License Lights3 estatus Gra He 436 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Center High Mounted Stoplight 437 W Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 440 Fog Lights 15s see eee eas 438 EnPgIn seas ed alan dt cse dS iba 1 440 B Fluids And Capacities n a 604040404 439 SSSI oe hae tebe Y 4 iced 4 d due 441
319. ransmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped 206 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ee will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature SALES CODE REN MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN multimedia system contains a radio CD DVD player USB port a 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD and a JukeBox virtual CD changer Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 inch touch screen allows for easy menu selection A 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port While the Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3
320. ransmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room temperature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended transmission fluid and filter change intervals Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission
321. rature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Defrost W Outside air is directed to the windshield through the defroster outlet located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C snowflake button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Rear Temperature Control ATC The REAR button cycles through the following modes Rear Control from Front This allows the driver or passenger to control the rear blower speeds rotating the POWER FAN knob and the rear temperature using the pass rear TEMP rocker switch While in this mode pressing the POWER FAN knob will turn the rear system off Pressing the POWER FAN knob will turn the rear system back on NOTE The display will show a REAR fan speed graph and a REAR digital temp setting CONTROL IN REAR This allows the passengers in the second row seats to control the blower speed and temperature by means of the rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as described under the Rear Zone Climate Control NOTE The front display will show CONTROL IN REAR ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 261 REAR OFF This turns the rear system off The control will return to
322. rd touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting 240 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ radios only with UConnect For sales code REN touch screen radio refer to the separate User s Manual This feature allows you to plug in an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a connector UCI connec tor using an optional connection cable available through Mopar See your authorized dealer for details Using this feature e the iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Track Title Artist Al bum etc information display on radio e the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e the iPod
323. re backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle and it is unable to recognize every obstacle in cluding small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Ob stacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist System NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IEEE e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system
324. release the switch Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection Driver s and Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Resetting the Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up Pull the window switch up and close the window com pletely then pull and hold the switch for 1 second Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window loc
325. ric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol
326. ring usage One example of such an occurrence may include a box or package ob structing the full rearward movement of the driver s seat Once the obstruction is removed the self limiting control may be restored to maximum position The self limiting control may be restored by first reaching the recently limited or obstructed position then release and reactivate the same button or buttons Continued seat travel beyond the obstructed position will indicate the recently encoun tered self limitation has been cleared es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control This additional feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle The seat cushion will move rear ward approximately 2 5 inches 60 mm when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward approximately 2 5 inches 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position Each stored memory setting will have an asso ciated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position The Easy Exit and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if the seat is positioned rearward enough and no benefit from moving the seat any farther rearward NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be en abled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to EASY EXIT SEAT under Pers
327. rking brake pull the parking brake release handle Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in PARK position When parking on a hill you should apply the Parking Brake before placing the gear shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of PARK NOTE The instrument cluster brake warning light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle E STARTING AND OPERATING 291 BRAKE SYSTEM ENN In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly increased over that required with the power system operating e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or vehicle may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in Park Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal injury capability the remaining system will still function w
328. rol OFF Control Switch This will the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW pene or neutral back to 4WD LOCK the ESP system will be in ee epo did mode i perauon HOP akya this mode This mode should be used for most all driving a braking event wath Ye svetich an dhe situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off for P specific reasons as noted below WARNING This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF Control In the Partial Off mode the engine torque reduction Switch When in Partial Off mode and stability features are desensitized Therefore the the engine management portion of enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is ESP has been desensitized the thresh unavailable stes Olds for ESP activation are raised and Partial Off the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off 302 STARTING AND OPERATING EE mode by pressing the ESP Control Switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP on by momentarily depress ing the ESP Control Switch This may be done with the vehicle is in motion 4WD LOW Range Partial Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP
329. ror 002005 83 Instrument Cluster 2 0000002 193 Instrument Panel and Controls 191 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 419 Integrated Power Module Fuses 427 Interior Appearance Care 0 00 418 Interior Buses eiue ERE wae dae ees 421 Interior Lighting 0 0c eee ee eee 138 Interior Lights ees aerua awa me RR e 138 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 144 Introduction ii omn phos Ae Gade code eae 4 Inverter Outlet 115V 22 eee ee 177 Jack Location 4 4x rre Ae Sed Res 367 Jack Operation sace ere tees 367 370 Jacking Instructions 000 371 Key Programming eresie eae rue 15 Key Replacement 00000 e ee eee 15 Key Sentry Immobilizer 13 Keyless Entry System scesa daaa koaa bamair a 20 KEYS aar pena a tow sind E ad e A 12 Knee Bolster 1 0 000 ee ees 53 Lane Change and Turn Signals 142 193 432 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 40 46 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 68 Life of lires RR ERE DOOPE YS 319 Liftgate led eee HE Oat eere 35 Lights 9499 preen Sethe hate PPS 77437 Pup A P P 61 203 Anti Lock Warning 0000 195 Automatic Headlights llus 140 Back Up cs eee Had edad ad PUES 432 Brake Warning 2 6 6 eee eee 199 Bulb Replacement 3 2 2 cen s 430 Center Mounted Stop 05 437 Cour
330. rvice center where it can be raised on a lift Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack The scissor jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only It is not recommended that the jack be used for service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time Preparations Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK automatic transmission On Four Wheel Drive vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site the jacking position For example if the right front wheel is being changed block the left rear wheel BLOCKA e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Instructions 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 When changing a front wheel place the jack under the frame rail behind the wheel Locate the jack as far WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 forward as possible on the straig
331. rving these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in drivability during warm up NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F you may experience hard starting and rough idle follow ing start up even if the above recommendations are followed Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in Mopar engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting DaimlerChrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufac turer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements devel oped during extensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an 342 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in drivability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel con sumption You c
332. s are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Once the warning is triggered it can be paused if the vehicle speed drops below 5 mph 8 km h The warning will be restarted if the vehicle speed becomes greater than 5 mph The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch
333. s come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The transmission is moved out of park Pressing the brake pedal The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting After either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position then back to LOCK DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks All the doors can be manually locked from the inside by pushing down the door lock plunger located at the rear of the door Both front doors may be opened from the inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switc
334. s manda tory to replace all clamps that have been loosened or removed during service Care should be taken in install ing new clamps to insure they are properly torqued Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plug ging because of deposits Deposits can accumulate in the PCV valve and passage with increasing mileage Have the PCV valve hoses and passages checked for proper operation at the intervals specified If the valve is plugged or sticking replace with a new valve Do not 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN attempt to clean the PCV valve Check ventilating hose for indication of damage or plugging with deposits Replace if necessary Brake System Power Disc Brakes Front and Rear Disc brakes do not require adjustment however several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material Brake Master Cylinders The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced or immediately if the brake system warning light is on If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked
335. s means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low tem perature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM warning lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPM warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME For example your vehic
336. seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each second row seating position located on the back of the seat Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attach ment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then attach the tether strap to the anchor age located on the back of the seat being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts Finally tighten all three straps as you push the chil
337. sed on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME JACKING INSTRUCTIONS Removing The Spare Tire The spare tire on your vehicle is located underneath the vehicle in the rear ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck 2 Engage the jack wrench extension to the spare tire 1 Remove the rubber plug from the floor in the cargo Winch throng the nons Tn the dioe area 3 Turn the wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Continue to turn the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose cable CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can dam age the winch 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN Tire Changing Procedure WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a se
338. selector in Park position WARNING Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in P Park Check by trying to move the gearshift lever back and forth without first pulling the lever toward you after you have set it in P Park Make sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal 278 STARTING AND OPERATING EE R Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Shift to Neutral when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle except as specified under Towing A Disabled Vehicle coasting or otherwise driv ing the vehicle while in N Neutral can cause severe transmission damage D Drive
339. sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight m of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant
340. service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem wi
341. should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Materials Added To Fuel Fuel System Cautions All gasolines sold in the United States are required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional CAUTION detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in unnecessary cost There fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunc tions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature is high use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock If spark knock persists lighten the load or engine piston damage may result The use of fuel additives which
342. size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 310 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas
343. so they can be used rearward facing ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system See the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System section e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system See the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder be
344. solve any warranty issues or related concerns E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 455 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best 456 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manu
345. spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this Section of this manual This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non slipping wheels to provide optimal forward trac tion ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objec
346. ss the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio e The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing
347. ssure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can be caused to go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may rollover when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully INTRODUCTION 5 Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S i government notes that the universal use of existing seat A WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more
348. stem BeltAlert 22 4 oic 50 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 52 MiSiiely Tips ae ox tat Vase eee es 75 Seat Belt Extender 0 0005 52 Exhaust System 2 ces eees aes Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Restraint System SRS Airbags 53 Vehicle zorres ea puoi e sane cence ean d e ute Event Data Recorder EDR 62 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Child Restraint isse 64 WCE emer C Ae doped Tee La a H Engine Break In Recommendations 74 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 8165df1a Ignition Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key Ignition Switch Positions NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the lever in PARK the key may become trapped temporarily ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as
349. sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions Window bags will also deploy on roll over events But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has window bags do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into
350. structions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 236 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc SALES CODE RER MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The RER multimedia system contains a radio Sirius Satelite Radio player Navigation system CD DVD player USB port 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD and the UConnect hands free Bluetooth cellular system NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect the unit will respond with a Feature Not Available message when selecting controls related to this feature A 6 5 inch touch screen allows easy menu selection while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1 000 words for audio navigation entertainment and hands free mobile phone use
351. system if equipped and power out lets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power out lets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to KEY OFF POWER DELAY OFF under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn will sound repeatedly for 3 minutes and the headlights and security light in the instrument cluster will flash for an additional 15 minutes The engine will not run until the system is disarmed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the security light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming The security l
352. t of Neutral N Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster If there are no indicator lights on or flashing the transfer case position is Four Wheel Drive 4WD and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection AWD 4WD LOCK The SVC 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the Service 4WD light is illu minated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The NV 244 Generation II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case You or others could be injured if you leave the When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD or Neutral N position without first fully engaging the 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take c
353. t of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact 7 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle wash it as soon as possible Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains and to polish your vehicle Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and liftgate be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
354. t the parking brake has not been released or there is a low brake fluid level If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake Booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake If the parking brake is applied the light will flash when the gear position is out of park for automatic transmis sions If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary Operating the vehicle in this condition is danger ous 22 ESP BAS Warning Lamp The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined ESP with BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on mo
355. tarting Normal Starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death 274 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Tip Start Feature Your vehicle has a Tip Start starting system With Tip Start the driver does not need to hold the key in the Start position until the vehicle starts but can release the key still in the ignition and the vehicle will continue through the start cycle e Turn the ignition key to the START position until the start motor engages e Release the key still in the ignition and the starter will continue through the start cycle until the vehicle starts or for 5 seconds whichever comes first If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 If the engine
356. tem Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion SNOWPLOW NOTE Do not use this vehicle for snowplow applica tions WARNING Snowplows winches and other aftermarket equip ment should not be added to the front end or your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision resulting in serious injury or death 360 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN CAUTION Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can cause damage to the vehicle WARNING Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in an acci dent Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Recreational Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable Towing the vehicle with the transmission in Neutral can cause severe transmission damage Removal of the drive shaft for towing is not recommended since this allows transmission fluid to leak out Recreational Towing 4WD Models CAUTION Vehicles equipped with an NV 140 Transfer Case which has no neutral position may NOT be used for recreational towing EN STARTING AND OPERATING 361 NOTE The NV 244 Generation II transfer case must be HORAN shifted into Neutral N for recreation
357. tem will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phone book entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phone book with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the Phone button and say Phonebook Download Sys
358. tem will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and should be avoided when pos sible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS Anti Lock Brake System BAS Brake Assist System TCS Traction Con trol System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation ESP Elec tronic Stability Program
359. tesy Reading esce err er es 158 enr M PP 203 Daytime Running 0 000000 eens 141 Dome cm 9e E C ERREUR 159 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator i hee ede oe Hehe OE YR 200 300 BOS wesheuw me esr EE 141 198 438 Hazard Warning Flasher 366 Headlights eo E eed ds 140 Mish Beam segg esas ar oes e e edad ee 143 High Beam Low Beam Select 143 Instrument Cluster llle 140 193 lnteriO sce ie db ees 8 A GS SUE RR UE 138 158 License se zem peda ete ERE bam ges 436 Lights On Reminder 0000 141 Low F el 4 224 mes 193 194 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 201 Park 2o tet ee tN dub vette ey i et 140 en INDEX 471 PASSING ok as Kak io CR REE OR KR 143 Reading eu ee hebetes GA auth bs 159 Seat Belt Reminder less 194 S rVIC Lucus gu ba Rae x bx EE GbR 430 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 201 Traction Control urbc Re EG ea 300 Tum Signal eseri erir RR a 142 432 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 193 Loading Vehicle sess au c0 23 0803482 p65 343 Tres ania wees ba a ae aa BIE Crk eh ee MIR ee a 309 Locks ud eub RAG Qux eG RR Tae Ce ERS 28 Automatic Door lt spss ereet padnin eea 30 Child Protection 22i rk des 32 WD OOK cuts a eh S Eu d EUR DEM 28 Iprition 26s EE EE 17 KEYS DEDE 12 Power Door ece cread pioa idt 63m kk ka 29 Steering Wheel ics nae Re RR CER D 17 472 INDEX EE Lower Anc
360. the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e After confirmation the phone book entries will be deleted e Note that only the phone book in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phone book entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or
361. the front system display after approximately 5 seconds if no buttons are pushed while in one of the rear system displays You may also return to the front system display sooner by pushing any button except the POWER FAN knob the rear button the driver passenger temp rocker buttons NOTE The display will show REAR OFF REAR AUTO This mode places the rear system in automatic tempera ture control Rear temperature can be set as desired 72 recommended for average person and will be displayed digitally on the front control when in rear mode Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window Washer Wiper See the Rear Window Features section of this book Rear Zone Climate Control If Equipped Headliner air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vane knobs on the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow 262 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M 811aa87d The rear compartment control uses two rotary knobs one for the temperature control and the other for the fan speed control The mode for the rear air conditioning and heating system is always controlled by the front control unit Fan and temperature can be controlled from the front control unit or the rear control unit Rear Rotary Blower Control The second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed only when the front control unit is in the REAR CONTROL positi
362. the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine ADD OIL MARK FULL RANGE MARK 80c0715e Change Engine Oil Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended en gine oil and filter change intervals NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first 4x4 Models If Used Primarily For Off Road Operation Every 50 hours of use Dusty Conditions Driving through dust laden air increases the problems of keeping abrasive materials out of the engine Under these conditions special attention should be given to the engine air cleaner and the crankcase inlet air cleaner The crankcase ventilation system should also be checked periodically Make sure that these units are always clean This will tend to reduce to a minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter the engine ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacture only recommends eng
363. tial to the safe Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer Tires General Information section of this manual on This could cause inadequate braking and possible Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures personal injury Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is pressures before trailer usage required when towing a trailer with electronically 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ME actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with WARNING a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes Ibs 907 kg when you need them and could have an accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lea
364. tomatic operation NOTE The system can be put into recirculate mode without affecting ATC operation This will prevent out side air from entering the vehicle Use this mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust Manual Control ATC You also may choose to customize your comfort by selecting the fan speed and mode manually Turning the fan speed knob or any mode button places the system into manual operation While in manual operation there are six fan speeds available and the choice of any mode The airflow temperature is adjusted automatically to maintain the desired comfort level You can adjust the temperature by pressing the or TEMP rocker switches FAN Control Use this knob to regulate the amount of air delivered through the system in any mode you select Rotation of the knob to increase clockwise or decrease counter clockwise fan speed Air Conditioning Operation Press this button to enable the air conditioning system Compressor operation is automatic when you press the AUTO button and no snowflake is shown A snowflake indicates that the A C system is enabled The snowflake will not be displayed in AUTO mode even though the A C system is enabled The compressor may operate at any temperature above 32 F 0 C NOTE The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for several seconds Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the com pressor
365. tor if equipped DO NOT jump start the battery If the indicator if equipped is dark or shows a green dot proceed as follows 1 Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles 3 Turn OFF heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery tem perature must b
366. trailer TSC Trailer Sway Control If Equipped e Trailer Sway Control Electronic TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system will reduce engine power and apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once the swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Even if your vehicle is equipped with electronic trailer sway control mechanical sway control is recommended when appropriate for the size of your trailer e Trailer Sway Control Mechanical The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 A weight distributing syste A weight distributing system works by applying lever DES
367. trol FRONT e 80a01400 The Front Blower controls the amount of air delivered to the passenger compartment There are four blower speeds The fan speed increases as you turn the control clock wise When the front blower control is turned to OFF the blower will be turned off and the system will be positioned in recirculation mode Front Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air 811b8660 NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both modes INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 253 Recirculation Mode Panel or Bi Level Select either the Panel or Bi Level mode positions when the outside air contains smoke odors high humidity or if rapid cooling of the interior is desired This feature allows for recir culation of interior air only when ei ther of these positions are selected Air flows through the panel outlets or panel and floor outlets in these modes c J 811b550b Panel 4 Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow 254 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Bi Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and those located on the floor NOTE There is a difference in temperature betwe
368. ts or other vehicles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur e ERM can not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less
369. ttery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and
370. uces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you 2 A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increas ing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A beltthat is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury And a belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to Removing Slack From Belt be used together 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 6 To release the belt push the red b
371. uding a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 2
372. ue fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler cap gas cap can operate on E 85 81ae46a9 E 85 Badge ETHANOL FUEL E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 8576 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 For best results a refueling pattern that alternates be tween E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuels it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Obse
373. uipped with an inter axle differ ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal all wheel drive position 4WD at all times on any given road surface including dry hard surfaced roads The 4WD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds This eliminates driveline binding and component wear normally associated with driving the vehicle in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads This feature provides the safety security and convenience of operating in all wheel drive at all times regardless of road conditions When additional traction is required the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together through the transfer case inter axle differential and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the WD Control Switch to these positions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The transfer case Neutral N position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch NOTE The transfer case Neutral N position is to be used for recreational towing only See Recreational Tow ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and ou
374. uld identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation DaimlerChrysler Corporation product involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped lime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seatbelt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection Cruise control status 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system status if equipped Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restr
375. ult in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control 322 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION IF EQUIPPED A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen gers 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 lbs 91kg of cargo Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle will be found on the face of the driver s door TIRE CHAINS Use Class S chains on your vehicle or other traction aids that meet SAE Type S specifications NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not install tire chains
376. umes are detected the cause should be located and corrected UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS la Viron ouaaa 24265 pais oes SOAs E Serv 83 Automatic Dimming Driver s Exterior Inside Day Night Mirror 83 Miror ST ESD DE ebsites ini id Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 83 m uu M iaa u H7 Outside Mirrors 0 0 0 eee ee 84 Operation cresce Rara rer dee 89 Se s ag DPhone Call Features esee a6 Electric Remote Control Mirrors 85 Uconn cc Stew Features 4 cepe diee di Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 86 Advanced Phone Connectivity 104 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 87 TOMOS Yon ould K AROA oua UConnect Systemi renari saraaa as 105 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information 6 114 Second Row 40 20 40 Seat Fold And la cde oco eu eens Ra EE ROSS Ras 114 TUMPIS Seah eeanin eae ear ier ee Stake me Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment 114 Thang Row seal BeN BQUIBped esistere Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners 115 a coit Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment If E Driver Memory System If Equipped 191 Equipped ice cie ex nde ek RR ayes 116 Setting Memory
377. ural plifier Bat Computer tery Feed 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE E Fuses Power Distribution Center stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number peius of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corre sponds to the following chart These fuses and relays can be obtained from your dealer Cartridge Mini Cavity Fuse Fise Description Relay 1 30 Amp Starter Pink 2 30 Amp Front Wiper Pink 3 40 Amp Brake Batt Green Power Distribution Center 4 30 Amp JB Feed Acc 2 Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri Pink bution center located in the left side of the engine 5 40 Amp Power Seats compartment Green This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and 6 30 Amp Run Remote Relay relays A description of each fuse and component may be Pink Feed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini Cavity Fuse E Description Cavity Fuse Description use Fuse Relay Relay 7 40 Amp Blower Motor Relay 15 50 Amp JB Feed Green Feed Red 8 40 Amp JB Feed Acc Delay 16 10Amp Spare Green Red 9 Spare 17 Spare 10 30 Amp ASD 18 20 Amp Fuel Pump Pink Yellow 11 40 Amp Power Liftgate If 19 20 Amp Next Generation Green Equipped Yellow Controller NGC 12 40 Amp JB Feed Heated 20 25 Amp 115v Power Inverter Green Rear Glass EBL T Clear Case Brake 21 20 Amp ABS Batt
378. ure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions This will also prevent snow ingestion into the ducts Operating Tips Chart INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 265 WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Start the vehicle open the windows and turn the blower control to the high position use AUTO AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS mode if equipped Set Mode control at 34 or 4 Set Temperature control to full cold VERY HOT WARM WEATHER COOL OR COLD HUMID 4545 CONDITIONS O COLD DRY CONDITIONS me WINDOW FOGGING ies and press the 4 button on After the hot air has been expelled close the windows and set the Mode control to the amp setting at either 73 or or press the amp button if equipped Once comfortable choose a mode position and adjust temperature control and blower speed as necessary for comfort If sunny use AUTO mode if equipped set the Mode control at 74 and press the button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at 3 No is necessary If sunny use AUTO mode if equipped set the Mode control at then press the X button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at Ys necessary In cloudy or dark weather use AUTO mode
379. using recovery and recycling equipment Front Suspension Ball Joints The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever the vehicle is serviced for other reasons Damaged seals should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination of the grease ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints All four wheel drive models are equipped with four constant velocity joints Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required However the joint boot should be inspected for external leakage or damage periodically If external leakage or damage is evident the joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately Continued op eration could result in failure of the joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease This would require complete replacement of the joint assembly Refer to the Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors iftgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safet
380. utton Pressing the SCAN button will play the first 5 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track press the SCAN button again During the SCAN mode you can also press the SEEK button to the left or right to go to the previous or next tracks RND Random Button RES Radios Only Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is on ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 243 List or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod TUNE SCROLL Knob In the List mode the TUNE SCROLL knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning the TUNE SCROLL knob clockwise forward and counter clockwise backward scrolls through lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE SCROLL knob to select and start playing the track By turning the TUNE SCROLL knob fast you can jump through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod will display all lists i
381. utton If Equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF If Equipped VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls If Equipped VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the Audio Select button If Equipped Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 227 e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default audio language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not
382. utton anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the Phone button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UCon nect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two proce dures 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for 5 seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
383. utton on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is etc If the front airbags are deployed the front comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor pretensioning retractors must be replaced will withdraw any slack in the belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Push in on the anchorage release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in the desired position Pull the seatback forward to ensure th
384. ve a tire pressure monitor ing sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the spare tire 2 If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM mes sage for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 sec onds and then display dashes in place of a pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 332 STARTING AND OPERATING The vehicl
385. vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid sentry keys you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch t
386. w function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 3 Press the STEP button until Calibrate Compass YES is displayed 2 Press the menu button until Personal Set tings is displayed 4 Press and release the RESET button to start the calibration The message CAL will display on the compass temperature screen in the EVIC 5 Slowly drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph in a Complete 360 circle in an area free from large metal or es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located 817ba7f0 Variance Map 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu 2 Press the menu
387. when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for approximately 3 seconds If this light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required See your authorized dealer immedi ately With the ABS malfunctioning the BAS and ESP are also switched off Both malfunction indicator lights illu minate with the engine running If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts the malfunction indicator light 196 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se illuminates and the ABS is switched off When the voltage is above this value again the malfunction indi cator light should go out and the ABS is operational If the malfunction indicator light stays illuminated have the system checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 12 Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light QE This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has become too low For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible Immediate service should be obtained 13 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 14 Gear Selector The electronic gear selector display is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the position of the automatic transmission shift lever and the relation of each
388. will become active automatically once the swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Irailer Tow ing in section 5 of this manual for other information on towing a trailer with your vehicle MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS 5 7L Engine Only This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY Ds AND STANDARDS a TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H STARTING AND OPERATING 305 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Met
389. y catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield and Rear Window Washers The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixtur
390. y system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK In the LOCK position the steering and ignition systems are locked to provide anti theft protection for your ve hicle It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your vehicle if the steering wheel is locked Move the steering wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns easily The key can be inserted or withdrawn only in the LOCK position Push in on the key in the ignition lock cylinder to rotate to the LOCK position Ignition Switch Positions 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING The key cannot be turned to LOCK until the selector is in the PARK position Do not attempt to pull the shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK position NOTE The steering wheel will lock when the key is removed and the steering wheel is turned around 115 degrees clockwise or 65 degrees counterclockwise from the center position Ignition Accessory Delay Feature For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free
391. y truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is espe cially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 WARNING CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The cargo management system consists of a removable cargo liner and removable cargo organizer Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack 1 Side Cover Latch 2 Main Cover Latch 3 Cargo Divider Handles 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To open the side cover pull on the cover latch and attach the cord to the upper cargo net hook To open the main cover pull up on the latch and attach the cord to the rear seat head restraint post To open the Cargo divider lift up on the cargo divider handles raising the doors to the full open position Raise the side panels until they engage into the doors 1 Cargo Divider Door 2 Cargo Divider Side Panel To remove the cargo management system from the ve hicle pull the right hand side of the organizer towards you so that the right pin slides out of the slot in the vehicle Push the organizer to the right and lift out of the vehicle INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
392. ystem will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example in USA 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid USA phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phone book The UConnect sys

Dodge 2008 Caliber Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents